Mitsubishi Electronics MR-J3- T manuale d’uso

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668

Vai alla pagina of

Un buon manuale d’uso

Le regole impongono al rivenditore l'obbligo di fornire all'acquirente, insieme alle merci, il manuale d’uso Mitsubishi Electronics MR-J3- T. La mancanza del manuale d’uso o le informazioni errate fornite al consumatore sono la base di una denuncia in caso di inosservanza del dispositivo con il contratto. Secondo la legge, l’inclusione del manuale d’uso in una forma diversa da quella cartacea è permessa, che viene spesso utilizzato recentemente, includendo una forma grafica o elettronica Mitsubishi Electronics MR-J3- T o video didattici per gli utenti. La condizione è il suo carattere leggibile e comprensibile.

Che cosa è il manuale d’uso?

La parola deriva dal latino "instructio", cioè organizzare. Così, il manuale d’uso Mitsubishi Electronics MR-J3- T descrive le fasi del procedimento. Lo scopo del manuale d’uso è istruire, facilitare lo avviamento, l'uso di attrezzature o l’esecuzione di determinate azioni. Il manuale è una raccolta di informazioni sull'oggetto/servizio, un suggerimento.

Purtroppo, pochi utenti prendono il tempo di leggere il manuale d’uso, e un buono manuale non solo permette di conoscere una serie di funzionalità aggiuntive del dispositivo acquistato, ma anche evitare la maggioranza dei guasti.

Quindi cosa dovrebbe contenere il manuale perfetto?

Innanzitutto, il manuale d’uso Mitsubishi Electronics MR-J3- T dovrebbe contenere:
- informazioni sui dati tecnici del dispositivo Mitsubishi Electronics MR-J3- T
- nome del fabbricante e anno di fabbricazione Mitsubishi Electronics MR-J3- T
- istruzioni per l'uso, la regolazione e la manutenzione delle attrezzature Mitsubishi Electronics MR-J3- T
- segnaletica di sicurezza e certificati che confermano la conformità con le norme pertinenti

Perché non leggiamo i manuali d’uso?

Generalmente questo è dovuto alla mancanza di tempo e certezza per quanto riguarda la funzionalità specifica delle attrezzature acquistate. Purtroppo, la connessione e l’avvio Mitsubishi Electronics MR-J3- T non sono sufficienti. Questo manuale contiene una serie di linee guida per funzionalità specifiche, la sicurezza, metodi di manutenzione (anche i mezzi che dovrebbero essere usati), eventuali difetti Mitsubishi Electronics MR-J3- T e modi per risolvere i problemi più comuni durante l'uso. Infine, il manuale contiene le coordinate del servizio Mitsubishi Electronics in assenza dell'efficacia delle soluzioni proposte. Attualmente, i manuali d’uso sotto forma di animazioni interessanti e video didattici che sono migliori che la brochure suscitano un interesse considerevole. Questo tipo di manuale permette all'utente di visualizzare tutto il video didattico senza saltare le specifiche e complicate descrizioni tecniche Mitsubishi Electronics MR-J3- T, come nel caso della versione cartacea.

Perché leggere il manuale d’uso?

Prima di tutto, contiene la risposta sulla struttura, le possibilità del dispositivo Mitsubishi Electronics MR-J3- T, l'uso di vari accessori ed una serie di informazioni per sfruttare totalmente tutte le caratteristiche e servizi.

Dopo l'acquisto di successo di attrezzature/dispositivo, prendere un momento per familiarizzare con tutte le parti del manuale d'uso Mitsubishi Electronics MR-J3- T. Attualmente, sono preparati con cura e tradotti per essere comprensibili non solo per gli utenti, ma per svolgere la loro funzione di base di informazioni e di aiuto.

Sommario del manuale d’uso

  • Pagina 1

    SH (NA) 030058-E (0806) MEE Printed in Japan Specifications subject to change without notice. This Instruction Manual uses recycled paper. MODEL MODEL CODE HEAD OFFICE : TOKYO BLDG MARUNOUCHI TOKYO 100-8310 J3 Series MR-J3- T Servo Amplifier Instruction Manual (CC-Link) E General-Purpose AC Servo MODEL MR-J3- T SERVO AMPLIFIER INSTRUCTION MANUAL (C[...]

  • Pagina 2

    A - 1 Safety Ins tructions (Alwa ys rea d thes e inst ruct ions before usin g the equip m ent.) Do not a ttem pt to insta ll, op erate, m aint ain or insp ect th e ser vo am plifier and s ervo m otor unti l you have re ad throug h this Ins truct ion Man ual, Inst allat ion guid e, Serv o motor Instruct ion Ma nual (Vol .2) and ap pended docum ents [...]

  • Pagina 3

    A - 2 1. To prevent electr ic shock , note the following WARNING Befor e wiri ng or inspec tion, turn of f the pow er and wait f or 15 m inutes or m ore u ntil t he char ge l amp tur ns off . Then, co nfirm that the volta ge bet ween P( ) and N( ) is s afe with a volt age t ester and o ther s. Other wise, an elec tric s hock m ay occur . In additi [...]

  • Pagina 4

    A - 3 4. Additional inst ructions The f ollowi ng ins truc tions should als o be fu ll y noted. Inc orrect handl ing m ay caus e a f aul t, inj ur y, electr ic sh ock, etc. (1) Transpor tation and installation CAUTION Trans port the pro ducts c orrec tly accor ding to their we ights. Stack ing in exces s of the s pecif ied num ber of pro ducts is n[...]

  • Pagina 5

    A - 4 (2) W iri ng CAUTION W ire the equ ipm ent corr ectly a nd sec urel y. Oth erwis e, the s erv o motor ma y oper ate unex pecte dly. Do not inst all a power c apac itor, sur ge a bsorb er or r adio noise filter (FR- BIF-( H) op tion) between the servo m otor and s ervo am pl ifier. Connec t the wires t o th e cor rect phas e ter mina ls (U , V[...]

  • Pagina 6

    A - 5 (4) Usa ge CAUTION Prov ide an exter nal em erge ncy st op c ircuit t o ens ure th at op eration c an be st opped and power s witc hed off imm ediatel y. Any pers on who is invol ved in disas sem bly and re pair sho uld be fu lly com petent to do the work . Befor e res etting an a larm, mak e sure tha t the run s ignal of the s erv o am plifi[...]

  • Pagina 7

    A - 6 (7) Gener al instruction To il lustr ate details , t he equ ipm ent in the d iagr ams of this Specif ic atio ns and Ins truct ion Ma nual ma y have been dr awn withou t cov ers an d safet y g uards. W hen the equ ipm ent is oper ated, th e cov ers a nd saf et y guards mus t be ins ta lled as specif ied. O pera tion m us t be per form ed in ac[...]

  • Pagina 8

    A - 7 COMPLIANCE WITH EC DIRECTIVES 1. W HAT ARE EC DIR ECTI VES ? The E C direc tives were issued to s tandar dize th e reg ula tions of the EU cou ntries and e nsur e sm ooth distr ibutio n of s afet y-guar anteed produc ts. I n the EU co untries , the mac hiner y direc ti ve (eff ective in Ja nuar y, 1995), EMC direct ive (ef fec tive in J anu a[...]

  • Pagina 9

    A - 8 (2) C onfigura tion The c ontro l cir cuit prov ide s afe se para tion t o the m ain ci rcuit in th e ser vo am plif ier. NFB MC No-fuse bre ake r Mag netic contactor Reinforced insulating type 24VDC power supply Servo amplifier Ser vo motor Control box M (3) En vir onment Opera te the s erv o am plifi er at or abo ve the contam in ation leve[...]

  • Pagina 10

    A - 9 (6) W iring (a) T he cab les to be co nnected to t he term in al bloc k of the s ervo amplif ier m us t have c rim ping ter mina ls prov ided w ith insula ting tubes to p revent con tact w ith adjacen t te rminal s. Crimping terminal Insulating tube Cable (b) Use the s ervo m otor s ide p ower c onnec tor which c om plies wit h th e EN St and[...]

  • Pagina 11

    A - 10 CONFORMANCE WITH UL/C-UL STANDARD (1) Ser vo am plif iers and s ervo m otors used Use the ser vo am plifier s an d ser vo m otors whic h com ply with th e st andar d mode l. Serv o ampl ifier :MR-J3-10T to MR-J3- 22KT MR-J3- 10T1 to MR-J3- 40T1 MR-J3- 60T4 to MR-J3- 22K T4 Se rvo mot o r : H F-M P HF-KP HF-SP (Note) HF-SP 4 (Not e) HC-RP HC-[...]

  • Pagina 12

    A - 11 (5) Opti ons and aux ili ary equi pment Use UL/ C-UL stand ard-com plia nt pro ducts . (6) Att achm ent of a ser vo m otor For t he fla nge si ze of th e mach ine si de wher e t he ser vo m otor is inst alle d, ref er to “ CON FOR MANCE W ITH UL/C -UL S TANDAR D” in the S ervo Mo tor In stru ction Manual (Vol.2 ). (7) Abo ut wiring prote[...]

  • Pagina 13

    A - 12 MEMO[...]

  • Pagina 14

    1 CONTENTS 1. FUNCT IONS AN D CONF IGURATION 1 - 1 to 1 -36 1.1 Intr oduct ion ............................................................................................................................................... 1 - 1 1.1.1 Fe atures of CC- Link comm unicat ion func tions ..................................................................[...]

  • Pagina 15

    2 3.6.3 Rem ote regist er-bas ed pos ition/s peed s ettin g ............................................................................. ... 3 -3 8 3.7 Funct ion-b y-functi on program ming ex amples .................................................................................. ...... 3 - 41 3.7.1 System c onfig ur ation ex ample ..............[...]

  • Pagina 16

    3 5. OP ERAT ION 5 - 1 t o 5 -6 0 5.1 Swi tchin g power on f or the f irst t ime ....................................................................................................... 5 - 1 5.1.1 S tartup proce dure ........................................................................................................ ...................... 5 - 1[...]

  • Pagina 17

    4 6.1.8 E lectro nic ge ar.......................................................................................................... ......................... 6 - 6 6.1.9 A uto tun ing .............................................................................................................. .......................... 6 - 7 6.1.10 I n-posi tion [...]

  • Pagina 18

    5 8.5 Dis pla y ...................................................................................................................................................... 8 - 7 8.5.1 O utlin e of s creen tr ans ition ............................................................................................. .................. 8 - 7 8.5.2 MR- PRU0 3 p[...]

  • Pagina 19

    6 12. OUT LINE DR AW INGS 12- 1 to 12-12 12.1 Ser vo am plifier ........................................................................................................... ........................... 12- 1 12.2 Conn ector ................................................................................................................. ..............[...]

  • Pagina 20

    7 15.3 Pro tocol ................................................................................................................................................. 15- 5 15.3.1 T ransm iss ion data c onfi gurati on ......................................................................................... ........... 15- 5 15.3. 2 Char ac ter c odes .[...]

  • Pagina 21

    8 16.5.3 T est operat ion .......................................................................................................... ..................... 16-3 3 16.5. 4 Param ete r se tting ....................................................................................................... ................... 16-34 16.5. 5 Point t a ble se ttin[...]

  • Pagina 22

    1 - 1 1. FUNCTIO NS AND CONFIGURATION 1. FUNCTIONS A ND CONFIGURATION 1.1 Introduc tion The MR-J 3- T CC-Link c om patible ser vo am plifier can s upp ort the CC-L ink c omm unication funct ions. Up to 42 axes of ser vo am plifi ers can be c ontro lled/m onitore d fro m the program m able co ntrol ler sid e. As the ser vo, it has th e func tion to [...]

  • Pagina 23

    1 - 2 1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURAT ION 1.1.2 Func tion block diagr am The fu ncti on block d iagr am of thi s servo i s shown be low. (1) MR -J3-3 50T or less MR-J 3-200T 4 or l ess RS-422 1 1000 1000 80 80 0 0 2 2000 2000 100 100 0 0 3 4000 2000 70 60 500 1 4 5 00 2000 60 7 0 1 000 1 5 2000 80 80 0 0 6 2000 1000 80 80 0 0 7 1000 1000 80 80 0 0 8 10[...]

  • Pagina 24

    1 - 3 1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURAT ION (2) MR-J3-350T4 MR-J 3-50 0T(4) MR-J3- 700T (4) RS-422 1 1000 1000 80 80 0 0 2 2000 2000 100 100 0 0 3 4000 2000 70 60 500 1 4 5 00 2000 60 7 0 1 000 1 5 2000 80 80 0 0 6 2000 1000 80 80 0 0 7 1000 1000 80 80 0 0 8 1000 1000 100 100 0 0 1000 1000 100 100 0 0 255 200 0 200 0 8 0 80 0 0 1000 No. Position data Spe[...]

  • Pagina 25

    1 - 4 1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURAT ION (3) MR-J3-11KT(4) to 22KT(4) RS-422 1 1000 1000 80 80 0 0 2 2000 2000 100 100 0 0 3 4000 2000 70 60 500 1 4 5 00 2000 60 7 0 1 000 1 5 2000 80 80 0 0 6 2000 1000 80 80 0 0 7 1000 1000 80 80 0 0 8 1000 1000 100 100 0 0 1000 1000 100 100 0 0 255 200 0 200 0 8 0 80 0 0 1000 No. Position data Speed Accel eration ti[...]

  • Pagina 26

    1 - 5 1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURAT ION 1.1.3 S ystem c onfiguratio n This sect ion pr ovides oper at ions us ing this ser vo. Use of CC- Link enabl es you t o free ly conf igure a ny s ystem f rom a s ingle-ax is s ystem to a n up to 42-axi s sy st e m. Set t he fol lowing valu es to t he po int ta ble. Name Setting range Unit Position data 999999 t[...]

  • Pagina 27

    1 - 6 1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURAT ION (2) Op erati on using CC-L ink c omm unicatio n fu nctions and ex terna l inp ut sig nals (a) Op erati on Using p aram eter No. PD06 to PD08 a nd param eter No.PD 12, PD 14, in put de vices can be as sign ed to the ex terna l inpu t de vices of CN 1A and CN1 B. T he si gnals assi gned t o th e ext ernal inpu t [...]

  • Pagina 28

    1 - 7 1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURAT ION 1.2 Serv o amplif ier stan dar d specif ications (1) 20 0V cla ss, 100V cl ass Servo am plifier MR-J 3- Item 10T 20T 40T 60T 70T 100T 200T 350T 500T 700T 11KT 15KT 22KT 10T1 20T1 40T1 Voltage/ frequency 3-phase or 1-phas e 200 to 230VAC, 50/ 60Hz 3-phase 200 to 230VA C, 50/60H z 1-phase 100V to 120VAC, 50/ 60Hz[...]

  • Pagina 29

    1 - 8 1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURAT ION Servo am plifier MR-J 3- Item 10T 20T 40T 60T 70T 100T 200T 350T 500T 700T 11KT 15KT 22KT 10T1 20T1 40T1 Dog type Home pos ition return i s made start ing with Z-phase pul se after pas sage of pro ximity dog. Home pos ition addres s may be set. Hom e position s hift dist ance may be set. Home posit ion return d[...]

  • Pagina 30

    1 - 9 1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURAT ION Servo am plifier MR-J 3- Item 10T 20T 40T 60T 70T 100T 200T 350T 500T 700T 11KT 15KT 22KT 10T1 20T1 40T1 [ ] (Note 2) 0 to 55 (no n-freezing ) In operation [ ] (Note 2) 32 to 131 (non-f ree zing) [ ] 20 to 65 (non-freezi ng) Ambient tem perature I n storage [ ] 4 to 149 (non-freezi ng) In operation Ambient humi[...]

  • Pagina 31

    1 - 10 1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURAT ION (2) 400V class Servo am plifier MR-J 3- Item 60T4 100T4 200T4 350T 4 500T4 700T4 11KT4 15KT4 22KT4 Voltage/ frequency 3-phase 380 to 480VA C, 50/60H z Permis sible volt age fluct uation 3-phase 323 to 528VAC Perm issible f requency fluct uation Wit hi n 5% Power supply c apacit y Ref er to sec tion 13.2 Power [...]

  • Pagina 32

    1 - 11 1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURAT ION Servo am plifier MR-J 3- Item 60T4 100T4 200T4 350T 4 500T4 700T4 11KT4 15K T4 22KT4 Dog type Home pos ition return i s made start ing with Z-phase pul se after pas sage of pro ximity dog. Home pos ition addres s may be set. Hom e position s hift dist ance may be set. Home posit ion return directi on may be s [...]

  • Pagina 33

    1 - 12 1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURAT ION Servo am plifier MR-J 3- Item 60T4 100T4 200T4 350T 4 500T4 700T4 11KT4 15K T4 22KT4 [ ] 0 to 55 (non-freezi ng) In operation [ ] 32 to 131 (non-free zing) [ ] 20 t o 65 (non-freezi ng) Ambient tem perature In st orage [ ] 4 t o 149 (non-freezi ng) In operation Ambient humidity In s torage 90%RH or les s (non-[...]

  • Pagina 34

    1 - 13 1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURAT ION 1.3 Func tion list The f ollowi ng tabl e list s the funct ions of this ser vo. For detai ls of t he f unctio ns, ref er to t he ref ere nce fie ld. Function Des cription Reference Positi oning by automatic operation Select the required ones f rom among 31 preset point tables and perform operation in acc ordan[...]

  • Pagina 35

    1 - 14 1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURAT ION Function Des cription Reference I/O signal select ion (Device setting) Any input device such as servo-on (SON) can be assigned t o any pin of CN6 connector. Para meter N o. PD06 to PD08 PD12 PD14 Torque limit Servo m otor-torque is limited. Section 4.6.3 Section 6.1. 11 Output signal (DO) forced output Output [...]

  • Pagina 36

    1 - 15 1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURAT ION 1.4 Mode l code d efinition (1) Rating plate Model Capacity Applicable power supply Rated output current Serial number MITSUBISHI MADE IN JAPAN MODEL MR-J3- 10T MITSUBISHI ELECT RIC CORPORAT ION AC SER V O PASSED POWE R : INPUT : OUT PUT : SERI AL : 100W 1.3A 1PH 200-230 V 50/60Hz 170V 0-360 Hz 1.1A A3423000 1[...]

  • Pagina 37

    1 - 16 1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURAT ION 1.5 Com bination with ser vo m otor The f ollow ing ta ble lists c om binat ions of ser vo am plif iers an d ser vo m otors. T he sam e com binatio ns app l y to the ser vo m otors with a n ele ctrom agnetic brak es and the ser vo m otors with a reduc tion gear. Ser vo motors HF-SP Servo amplifi er HF-MP HF-K [...]

  • Pagina 38

    1 - 17 1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURAT ION 1.6 Structure 1.6.1 Parts identif icat ion (1) MR -J3-1 00T or less 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 Fixed part (2 places) RS-422 communication c onnector (CN3) Used to connect the MR-PRU03 parameter unit or personal computer. Section 4.1 Section 4.3 Section 12.1 L.RUN SD RD L.ERR Se[...]

  • Pagina 39

    1 - 18 1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURAT ION (2) MR-J3-200T(4) or less 5 3 2 0 8 7 5 3 2 0 8 7 5 3 2 0 8 7 Cooling fan Fixed part (3 places) RS-422 communication connector (CN3) Used to connect the MR-PRU03 parameter unit or personal computer. Section 4.1 Section 4.3 Section 12.1 L.RUN SD RD L.ERR Set the number of occupied stations. Station number switc[...]

  • Pagina 40

    1 - 19 1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURAT ION (3) MR-J3-350T 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 Fixed part (3 places) Cooling fan RS-422 communication c onnector (CN3) Used to connect the MR-PRU03 parameter unit or personal computer. Section 4.1 Section 4.3 Section 12.1 L.RUN SD RD L.ERR Set the number of oc cupied stations. Stati[...]

  • Pagina 41

    1 - 20 1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURAT ION (4) MR-J3-350T4 MR-J 3-50 0T(4) POINT The s ervo amplif ier is s how n without th e fr ont cover. F or rem oval of the front cover, ref er to sec tion 1.6. 2. 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 Cooling fan Fixed part (4 places) RS-422 communication connector (CN3) Used to connect the M[...]

  • Pagina 42

    1 - 21 1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURAT ION (5) MR-J3-700T(4) POINT The s ervo amplif ier is s how n without th e fr ont cover. F or rem oval of the front cover, ref er to sec tion 1.6. 2. 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 Cooling fan RS-422 communication connector (CN3) Used to connect the MR-PRU03 parameter unit or personal c[...]

  • Pagina 43

    1 - 22 1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURAT ION (6) MR-J3-11KT(4) to MR-J3-22KT(4) POINT The s ervo amplif ier is s how n without th e fr ont cover. F or rem oval of the front cover, ref er to sec tion 1.6. 2. 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 Fixed part (4 places) Cooling fan Charge lamp Lit to indicate that the main circuit is c [...]

  • Pagina 44

    1 - 23 1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURAT ION 1.6.2 Rem oval and reinst allatio n of the f ront cover W ARNING Be fore removi ng or insta lling the fr ont c ove r, tur n off t he pow er a nd wai t for 15 minutes or m ore u ntil t he c harge lam p turns off. T hen, c onf irm that t he vo ltage between P( ) and N( ) is safe with a volt age tester and other [...]

  • Pagina 45

    1 - 24 1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURAT ION Rein stallation of the fr ont c ove r Front co ver setti ng tab a) a) Insert the fr ont c over s ettin g tabs into the soc kets of servo am pl ifier (2 p laces) . Pull up the cove r, supp orti ng at poi nt a) . Setti ng tab Push the sett ing tab s until they click.[...]

  • Pagina 46

    1 - 25 1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURAT ION (2) For MR-J3-11KT(4) to MR-J3-22KT(4) Remo val of the f ront c over c) b) a) 1) Press the rem oving k nob on the lo wer sid e of the front c over ( a) a nd b) ) and rel ease t he ins tallat ion hook . 2) Pres s the rem oving k nob of c ) and r eleas e the exter nal hook . 3) Pu ll it t o rem ove the fr ont c [...]

  • Pagina 47

    1 - 26 1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURAT ION 1.7 Conf iguratio n includ ing aux iliar y equipm ent POINT Equipm ent other tha n the s ervo am plif ier and ser vo motor are opt ional or recomm ended produc ts. (1) MR -J3-1 00T or less (a) For 3-phas e or 1-ph ase 20 0V to 2 30V AC CN5 PC CN6 CN2 CN4 I/O signal U V W CN3 L 1 L 3 L 2 P 1 P 2 CN1 CC-Link Mag[...]

  • Pagina 48

    1 - 27 1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURAT ION (b) For 1-phas e 10 0V t o 120V AC CN5 PC CN6 CN2 CN4 U V W CN3 CN1 CC-Link R S (Note 3) Power supply No-fuse breaker (NFB) or fu se Mag netic contactor (MC) (Note 2) Line noise filter (FR-BSF01) Power factor improving DC reactor (FR-BEL) Regenerative option (Note 1) Batte ry MR-J3 BAT Serv o motor I/O signal [...]

  • Pagina 49

    1 - 28 1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURAT ION (2) MR-J3-60T4 MR-J 3-100 T4 Servo amplifier (Note 1) Batter y MR-J3BAT (Note 3) Power supply No-fuse breaker (NFB) or fuse R S T CN2 CN4 PC L 21 L 11 W V U P 1 P 2 L 1 L 2 L 3 CN5 CN3 CN6 MR Configurator CC-Link CN1 I/O s ign al Magnetic contactor (MC ) (Note 2) Powe r factor improving DC reactor (FR-BEL-H) R[...]

  • Pagina 50

    1 - 29 1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURAT ION (3) MR-J3-200T(4) Servo amplifier (No te 1) Battery MR-J3BAT (Note 3) Power supp ly No-fuse breaker (NFB ) or fu se MR Configurator I/O s ign al Magnetic contactor (MC ) (Note 2) Power facto r im prov ing DC reactor (FR-BEL/ FR-BE L-H) Regenerative option Servo m otor Personal computer (Note 2) Line noise filt[...]

  • Pagina 51

    1 - 30 1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURAT ION (4) MR-J3-350T Power fac tor improving DC reactor (FR-BEL ) Line noise filter (FR-BLF) R S T CN5 CN3 CN2 CN4 CN6 CC-Link P C P 1 P 2 L 21 L 11 U CN1 UV W L 1 L 3 L 2 (Note 3) Power supply No-fuse breaker (NFB) or fuse Magne tic contactor (MC) (Note 2) (Note 1) Batter y MR-J3BAT Serv o motor I/O signal Personal[...]

  • Pagina 52

    1 - 31 1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURAT ION (5) MR-J3-350T4 MR-J 3-50 0T(4) R S T L 21 P 1 P 2 CN5 CN3 CN2 CN4 CN6 L 11 UV W C P L 1 L 2 L 3 CC-Link CN1 (Note 3) Powe r supply No-fuse breaker (NFB) or fuse Magnetic contactor (MC) (Note 2) Line noise filter (FR-BLF) Power facto r im prov ing DC reactor (FR-BEL-(H) ) (Note 2) (Note 1) Batte ry MR-J3 BAT S[...]

  • Pagina 53

    1 - 32 1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURAT ION (6) MR-J3-700T(4) R S T L 21 P 2 P 1 CN5 CN3 CN2 CN4 CN6 L 11 UV W C P L 1 L 2 L 3 CC-Link (Note 3) Power supply No-fuse breaker (NFB) or fuse Magnetic contactor (MC) Line noise filte r (FR-BLF) Power fac tor improving DC reactor (FR -BEL -(H )) (Not e 2) Regenerative option Servo mot or I/O si gnal Personal c[...]

  • Pagina 54

    1 - 33 1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURAT ION (7) MR-J3-11KT(4) to MR-J3-22KT(4) R S T L 21 L 11 U V W C P L 1 L 3 CN4 CN5 CN6 CN2 P 1 P CC-Link CN3 L 2 (Note 3) Powe r supply No-fuse breaker (NFB) or fuse Mag netic contactor (MC) Line noise filter (FR-BLF) Regenerative option Servo m otor I/O signal Personal computer MR Co nfig urator Servo amplifier (No[...]

  • Pagina 55

    1 - 34 1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURAT ION 1.8 Selec tion of operation m ethod Using the C C-Link com m unicatio n funct ions, this ser vo e nables a wi de var iet y of oper ation m ethods. T he operat ion m ethod cha nges de pend ing on the in put de vice, param eter and point ta ble sett ing. The f low of the oper ation m ethod that c hanges depe ndi[...]

  • Pagina 56

    1 - 35 1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURAT ION Positioning is started by making the start signal valid after selection of the point table with the remote input. Using the auxiliary fun ction, automatic continuous operation can be performed with multiple point tables. Sec tion 3.8 .2 Section 5.4.2 (1) Sec tion 3.8 .2 Section 5.4. 2 (4)( b)1) Sec tion 3.8 .2[...]

  • Pagina 57

    1 - 36 1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURAT ION MEMO[...]

  • Pagina 58

    2 - 1 2. INSTALLATION 2. INSTALLA TION CAUTION Stack ing in exces s of the l im ited num ber of prod ucts is no t allo wed. Instal l the eq uipm ent on inc om bustib le m aterial. I nstal ling t hem dir ectl y or clos e to com bustibles wil l lead to a fir e. Instal l the equ ipment in a l oad-be arin g place in ac cor dance wit h this Inst ruct io[...]

  • Pagina 59

    2 - 2 2. INSTALLATION (b) I nstal lation of t wo or m ore s ervo am plifier s POINT Close m ounting is availab le f or the servo amplif ier of under 3. 5kW for 200V class and 400W for 100V cl ass. Leave a lar ge cle aranc e be tween the t op of the s ervo amplif ier and th e in terna l surf ace of the c ontro l box, and insta ll a co oling f an to [...]

  • Pagina 60

    2 - 3 2. INSTALLATION (b) I nstal lation of t wo or m ore s ervo am plifier s Leave a lar ge cle aranc e be tween the t op of the s ervo amplif ier and th e in terna l surf ace of the c ontro l box, and insta ll a co oling f an to pr event th e inter nal te m perature of the con trol bo x fr om exceed ing the environm ent al co ndit ions. Control b[...]

  • Pagina 61

    2 - 4 2. INSTALLATION 2.4 Inspec tion item s W ARNING Befor e star ting m ain tenanc e and/or ins pecti on, tur n off the power and wa it f or 15 minutes or m ore until t he char ge lam p turns off . Then, conf irm that the vo ltage betwe en P( ) and N( ) is safe with a v oltage t ester a nd others . Other wis e, an electric shoc k m a y occur . I [...]

  • Pagina 62

    3 - 1 3. CC-LINK COMMUNICATI ON FUNCTIONS 3. CC-LINK COMMUNICATION FUNCTIONS 3.1 Com munic ation sp ecific ations POINT This servo is e quiva lent to a rem ote device s tatio n. For det ails of th e pro gramm able c ontro ller s ide s pec ifica tions, refer to t he C C-Link syst em master unit m anua l. Item S pecifications Power supply 5VDC suppli[...]

  • Pagina 63

    3 - 2 3. CC-LINK CO MMUNI CATION FUNCT IONS 3.2 System configuration 3.2.1 Config urat ion exam ple (1) Pr ogram m able con tro ller s ide Fit "T ype QJ61BT 1 1N", "T ype A1SJ 61 BT11" or "T ype A1 SJ61Q BT11 " "Con tro l & Comm unicat ion Li nk system m aster/loc al m odule" to the m ain or exte nsion ba[...]

  • Pagina 64

    3 - 3 3. CC-LINK CO MMUNI CATION FUNCT IONS 3.2.2 W iring m ethod (1) C omm unicat ion co nnect or The pin la yout of the comm unicat ion con nect or CN10 o n the ser vo amplif ier un it is sho wn belo w. DA DG DB SLD FG Servo amplifier CN1 CN1 (2) C onnect ion ex am ple The s ervo am plifi er and pro gramm able co ntrol ler CC-L ink master unit ar[...]

  • Pagina 65

    3 - 4 3. CC-LINK CO MMUNI CATION FUNCT IONS (4) How to wire the CC-Link connector (CN1) (a) Stri p the shea th of the cab le and sep arate th e inter nal wir es and bra ided sh ield . (b) Stri p the shea ths of the bra ided sh ield and inter nal wires and twist th e cores . 3-core twisted pair cable Braided shield Approx. 10mm (c) Matc h an d twis [...]

  • Pagina 66

    3 - 5 3. CC-LINK CO MMUNI CATION FUNCT IONS 3.2.3 Stati on num ber settin g POINT Be sure to s et the st ation num bers within the ra nge of 1 to 64. Do n ot set the other values . (1) Ho w to number th e stati ons Set th e servo st ation nu m bers be fore powering on the se rvo ampl ifier s. Note the follow ing poin ts when setti ng the st ation n[...]

  • Pagina 67

    3 - 6 3. CC-LINK CO MMUNI CATION FUNCT IONS 3.2.4 Comm unic ation baud rate sett ing Set the trans fer ba ud rat e of CC-Link with the tr ansfer baud r ate s witch (MOD E) on the ser vo am plif ier fr ont. The i nitia l va lue is set t o 15 6kbps . The ov erall d istanc e of the s ystem chan ges wit h the transf er speed s ett ing. For detai ls, re[...]

  • Pagina 68

    3 - 7 3. CC-LINK CO MMUNI CATION FUNCT IONS 3.3 Func tions 3.3.1 Functi on bloc k diagr am This sectio n ex plains the tr ansf er of I/O d ata to/f rom the ser vo am plifier in CC-Li nk, u sing f uncti on b locks . (1) Be tween th e m aster s tation an d ser vo am plifi er in th e CC-Li nk s ystem, link ref resh is norm all y perf orm ed at inter v[...]

  • Pagina 69

    3 - 8 3. CC-LINK CO MMUNI CATION FUNCT IONS 3.4 Serv o amplif ier sett ing (1) Se rvo am pl ifier s ide oper atio n m odes This servo am plifi er has th e follo wing op erat ion mod es. Operation m ode Description Test operation mode P arameter unit or personal computer in which MR Confi gurator is installed is used to run the serv o motor . CC-Lin[...]

  • Pagina 70

    3 - 9 3. CC-LINK CO MMUNI CATION FUNCT IONS 3.5 I/O sign als (I/O devices ) transf erred to/f rom the pro gramm able contr oller CPU 3.5.1 I/O sig nals (I/O de vices) The inp ut sign als (in put dev ices) m ay be use d as eit her the CC- Link or CN6 ex ternal input s ignals. M ake select ion in p aram eter No. PD06 to PD 11, PD 12 an d PD14. T he o[...]

  • Pagina 71

    3 - 10 3. CC-LINK CO MMUNI CATION FUNCT IONS (2) W hen 2 s tatio ns are occ upie d RXn/RYn : 64 points each, R W rn/R W wn: 8 points each Program mable co ntroll er Serv o amplifi er (R Yn) Servo am plifi er Progr ammabl e con troller (RXn) (Note 1 ) Device No. Signal name Signal abbrevi ation CN6 connector pin No. (Note 1 ) Device No. Signal nam e[...]

  • Pagina 72

    3 - 11 3. CC-LINK CO MMUNI CATION FUNCT IONS Program mable co ntroll er Serv o amplifi er (RW wn) Servo amplifi er Progr amm able con troller (RW rn) (Note 1 ) Address N o. Signal name (Not e 1) Address N o. Signal name RW wn (Not e 2) Moni tor 1 RWrn Moni tor 1 dat a lo wer 16 bit RW wn 1 (N ote 2) Monitor 2 RW wn 1 Monito r 1 data upper 16 bit RW[...]

  • Pagina 73

    3 - 12 3. CC-LINK CO MMUNI CATION FUNCT IONS 3.5.2 Detai led expl anation of I/O s ignals (1) In put si gnals ( Input devi c es) The no te si gns i n the r em arks colum n indic ates the fo llow ing des crip tions. 1: Can be us ed as ex tern al in put si gnals of CN 6 conn ector by sett ing param eters No.PD06 to P D08 and param eter N o.PD12 PD14 [...]

  • Pagina 74

    3 - 13 3. CC-LINK CO MMUNI CATION FUNCT IONS Device No. Signal name Description 1 stati on occupied 2 stations occupied Remar ks Proximit y dog In the shipment stat us, the proximity dog external input signal (CN6- 2) is valid . For u s e in CC-Lin k, make i t usab le in paramet er No.PD14. When RYn3 is turned OFF, the proximity dog is detected. Th[...]

  • Pagina 75

    3 - 14 3. CC-LINK CO MMUNI CATION FUNCT IONS Device No. Signal name Description 1 stati on occupied 2 stations occupied Remar ks Monitor output executi on demand When RYn8 is turned ON, the following data and signals are set. At the same t ime, RXn8 turns ON. While RY n8 is ON, t he monitor values are kept updated. 1) When 1 s tation is occupied Re[...]

  • Pagina 76

    3 - 15 3. CC-LINK CO MMUNI CATION FUNCT IONS Device No. Signal name Desc ription 1 st ation occupied 2 stations occupied Remar ks Position i nstruction demand When RY(n 2)0 is turned ON, the point tabl e No. or position command data set to remote regist er R W wn 4/RW wn 5 is set. When it i s set to t he servo am plifier, the res pond code indicat [...]

  • Pagina 77

    3 - 16 3. CC-LINK CO MMUNI CATION FUNCT IONS Device No. Signal name Desc ription 1 st ation occupied 2 stations occupied Remar ks Absolute value/ incremental value select ion RY(n 2)B is made valid when the remote regist er-based positi on/speed speci fying syst em is sel ected with Positi on/speed specifyi ng system selecti on (RY(n 2)A) and the a[...]

  • Pagina 78

    3 - 17 3. CC-LINK CO MMUNI CATION FUNCT IONS (2) Ou tput sign als (Out put devi ce) POINT The output devices can be used for both the r emote o utput an d the exter nal out put si gnal s of CN6 connect or. The sig nal wh ose De vice No. fi eld has an o bliqu e line can not be used i n CC-L ink . Device No. Signal name Description 1 stat ion occupie[...]

  • Pagina 79

    3 - 18 3. CC-LINK CO MMUNI CATION FUNCT IONS Device No. Signal name Description 1 stat ion occupied 2 stations occupied Instruc tion code executi on completion Refer to Instruct ion code execution demand (RYn9). RXn9 R Xn9 Warning RXnA turns ON when a w arning oc curs. When no warning has occurred, RXnA turns OFF within about 1s after power-on. RX [...]

  • Pagina 80

    3 - 19 3. CC-LINK CO MMUNI CATION FUNCT IONS Device No. Signal name Description 1 stat ion occupied 2 stations occupied Trouble A trouble is assigned to the CN6-15 pin as an external output signal. RX (n 1)A or RX(n 3)A turns ON when the protective circuit is activat ed to shut off the base c ircuit. When no alarm has occurred, RX(n 1)A or RX(n 3)A[...]

  • Pagina 81

    3 - 20 3. CC-LINK CO MMUNI CATION FUNCT IONS Remote register 1 station occupied 2 stations occupied Signal name Description S etting range RWwn+2 RWwn+2 Inst ruction code Sets the inst ruction code used to perform parameter or point tabl e data read and w rite, alarm referenc e or the like. Setting the inst ruction code No. to R W wn+2 and turning [...]

  • Pagina 82

    3 - 21 3. CC-LINK CO MMUNI CATION FUNCT IONS (b) Out put ( Serv o am plifier Progr amm able co ntrol ler) Note t hat the dat a set t o RW rn and RW rn+1 dep ends on wh ether 1 stat ion or 2 st atio ns ar e occup ied. If you s et in appro priat e cod e No. or dat a to the rem ote r egist er input , the err or code is s et to r espon d code ( RW rn+2[...]

  • Pagina 83

    3 - 22 3. CC-LINK CO MMUNI CATION FUNCT IONS 3.5.3 Monit or codes To dem and 32-b it data when 2 stat ions ar e occu pied, spec if y the lo wer 16-bi t code No . Use an y of the instr uctio n codes 010 1 to 011C to r ea d the d ecim al po int pos itio n (m ultip lyin g factor ) of the s tatus ind ication . Sett ing an y code No. t hat is not g ive [...]

  • Pagina 84

    3 - 23 3. CC-LINK CO MMUNI CATION FUNCT IONS 3.5.4 Instr uction co des (R W wn+2 RW wn +3 ) Refer t o sec tion 3. 6.2 f or th e instr uction co de tim ing ch arts. (1) Read in struction cod es The word data r eques ted t o be re ad wi th the i nstruct ion c ode 00 00h t o 0AFF h is r ead b y Read c ode (RW rn+3). Set the c om mand c ode No. corres [...]

  • Pagina 85

    3 - 24 3. CC-LINK CO MMUNI CATION FUNCT IONS Code No. Item/Funct ion Reading data (RW rn 3) cont ents (Serv o amplifier P rogrammable controller) 0040h Input device status 0 Reads the statuses (OFF/ON) of the input devices. bit 0 t o bit F i ndicate the OFF/ON st atuses of the corres ponding input devices. Refer to s ection 3.5.1 for the m eanings [...]

  • Pagina 86

    3 - 25 3. CC-LINK CO MMUNI CATION FUNCT IONS Code No. Item/Funct ion Reading data (RW rn 3) cont ents (Serv o amplifier P rogrammable controller) 0052h Output device st atus 2 Reads the statuses (OFF/ON) of the Output devices. bit 0 t o bit F i ndicate the OFF/ON st atuses of the corres ponding output devic es. Refer to section 3.5.1 for the meanin[...]

  • Pagina 87

    3 - 26 3. CC-LINK CO MMUNI CATION FUNCT IONS Code No. Item/Funct ion Reading data (RW rn 3) cont ents (Serv o amplifier P rogrammable controller) 0100h to 011Dh Monitor mul tiplying f actor Reads the multiplying fact or of the data to be read with t he monitor c ode. The instructi on codes 0100 to 011D correspond t o the monitor codes 0000 to 001D.[...]

  • Pagina 88

    3 - 27 3. CC-LINK CO MMUNI CATION FUNCT IONS Code No. Item/Funct ion Reading data (RW rn 3) cont ents (Serv o amplifier P rogrammable controller) 0601h to 06FFh Servo mot or speed of point tabl e No.1 to 255 The decimal value convert ed from the 2 lower digits of the code No. corresponds to the point table No. The servo m otor speed set to the requ[...]

  • Pagina 89

    3 - 28 3. CC-LINK CO MMUNI CATION FUNCT IONS Code No. Item Writing data (RW wn+3) contents (Programmable c ontroller Servo a m plifier ) 8201h to 82FFh Dat a R AM ins t ruc ti on o f p aram et er Writes the set value of eac h No. of the paramet er group w ritten by c ode No.8200h to RAM. These values are cleared when power is switc hed off. The dec[...]

  • Pagina 90

    3 - 29 3. CC-LINK CO MMUNI CATION FUNCT IONS Code No. Item Writing data (RW wn 3) cont ents (Programmable c ontroller Servo a m plifier ) 8801h to 88FFh Decele ration ti me con stant data RAM command of point table Writes the decelerat ion time constants of point tabl e No.1 to 255 to R AM. These values are cleared when power is switched off. The d[...]

  • Pagina 91

    3 - 30 3. CC-LINK CO MMUNI CATION FUNCT IONS Code No. Item Writing data (RW wn+3) contents (Programmable c ontroller Servo a m plifier ) 8E01h to 8EFFh Accelerat ion time const ant data EEP-ROM command of point table Writes the accelerat ion time constants of point table No.1 to 255 to EEP-ROM. Written to EEP-ROM, these values are hel d if pow er i[...]

  • Pagina 92

    3 - 31 3. CC-LINK CO MMUNI CATION FUNCT IONS 3.5.5 Respo nd codes (RW rn+2) If an y of th e moni tor c odes, instruc tio n cod es, pos itio n com m and data/p oint table Nos., s peed com mand data/ point t able N os. s et to the r em ote reg ister is outs ide t he sett ing rang e, the c orres pond ing err or cod e is set to res pond c ode ( RW wn+2[...]

  • Pagina 93

    3 - 32 3. CC-LINK CO MMUNI CATION FUNCT IONS 3.5.6 Setti ng the C N6 ext ernal in put signa ls Using param eter N o.PD 06 t o PD08, PD1 2 and PD14, you c an assign the input devi ces as t he C N6 ex tern al input s igna ls. T he sign als assig ned as the CN6 ext erna l inpu t devic es c annot be us ed in CC-L ink . Refer t o section 4.5. 1 for t he[...]

  • Pagina 94

    3 - 33 3. CC-LINK CO MMUNI CATION FUNCT IONS 0 BIN 0: Used in CC-Link BIN 1: Use d as CN6 exter nal inpu t signal 0 Initi al value BIN HEX Device name 0 0 0 Temporary stop/Rest art (T ST P ) 0 Initi al value BIN HE X Device name 0 0 0 0 Automatic/manual selection (MD0 ) 8 Initial value BIN HEX Device name 0 0 0 1 Proximity dog (DOG) 0 Pa ram et e r[...]

  • Pagina 95

    3 - 34 3. CC-LINK CO MMUNI CATION FUNCT IONS 3.6 Data com m unication ti ming char ts 3.6.1 Monit or codes (1) W hen 1 station is occ upied Data HOLD ON OFF Monitor 1 (RWwn ) Monitor 2 (RWwn+1) Monitor ex ecution dema nd (RY n8) ON OFF Monitori ng (RXn8) Monitor 1 data (RWrn) Monitor 2 data (RWrn+1) Respond code (RWrn+2) Set the m onitor c odes (re[...]

  • Pagina 96

    3 - 35 3. CC-LINK CO MMUNI CATION FUNCT IONS (2) W hen 2 stations are occ upied Da ta HO LD ON OFF Monitor 1 (RWwn) Monitor 2 (RW wn+1) Monitor executi on demand ( RYn8) ON OFF Monitori ng (RXn8) Monitor 1 data Lower 16b it (RWrn) Monitor 1 data Upper 16bit (RWrn+1) Monitor 2 data Lower 16b it (RWrn+5) Monitor 2 data Upper 16bit (RWrn+6) Respond co[...]

  • Pagina 97

    3 - 36 3. CC-LINK CO MMUNI CATION FUNCT IONS 3.6.2 Instr uction co des (1) R ead ins truc tio n codes ( 0000 h to 0A1Fh) Instruction code (RWwn+2) Data read pe riod Instruction code execution demand (RYn9) Instruction code execution completion (RXn9) Rea din g data (RWrn+3) Respond code (RWrn+2) Set the re ad instr uct ion cod e (ref er to secti on[...]

  • Pagina 98

    3 - 37 3. CC-LINK CO MMUNI CATION FUNCT IONS (2) W rite instr uctio n co des ( 8000 h to 911Fh) Instruction code (RWwn+2 ) Instruction code processing Instruction code execution completion (RXn9) Writing data (RWwn+3 ) Instruction code execution demand (RYn9) Write in execution Respond code (RWrn+2) Set the write ins truc tion co de (refer to secti[...]

  • Pagina 99

    3 - 38 3. CC-LINK CO MMUNI CATION FUNCT IONS 3.6.3 Rem ote regist er-base d positio n/speed s ettin g The f unctions in this sect ion are us ab le when Posit ion /speed s pecif yin g s y stem sel ectio n (R Y(n+2) A) is ON (remot e reg ister -based positi on/s peed spe cifyi ng sy stem is sele cted) wi th 2 stations occu pied. The posi tion c omm a[...]

  • Pagina 100

    3 - 39 3. CC-LINK CO MMUNI CATION FUNCT IONS (2) W hen sett ing the pos itio n com mand data/ point table No. (s peed c omm and) Specif y t he pos ition addres s with the r em ote re gister , an d spec if y the s peed c omm and da ta b y spec if ying the poi nt ta ble No . to us e t he pres et ser vo m otor s peed, acce lerat ion tim e cons tant an[...]

  • Pagina 101

    3 - 40 3. CC-LINK CO MMUNI CATION FUNCT IONS (3) W hen sett ing the pos itio n com mand data and s peed c omm and dat a Specif y t he pos ition addres s an d ser vo m otor sp eed w ith t he rem ote r egist er, and ex ecute posi tionin g. A t this tim e, use the ac celer ati on time co nstant a nd decel eration tim e constant set in point ta ble No.[...]

  • Pagina 102

    3 - 41 3. CC-LINK CO MMUNI CATION FUNCT IONS 3.7 Func tion-b y-function programm ing exam ples This sect ion ex plai ns sp ecif ic pr ogram m ing exam ples for s ervo oper ation, m onitor, param eter r ea d and write, and oth ers o n th e basis of t he equ ipm ent mak eup s hown in sec tion 3 .7.1. 3.7.1 S ystem c onfiguratio n exam ple As show n b[...]

  • Pagina 103

    3 - 42 3. CC-LINK CO MMUNI CATION FUNCT IONS (3) Relationship o f remote I/O (RX, RY) The f ollowin g sh ows a r elatio nship between the d evices of the program m able contr oller CPU a nd th e rem ote I/Os ( RX, R Y) of the r emote d evic e stat ions . Shaded area s ho ws the devic es actu all y used. X100F to X1000 X101F to X1010 X102F to X1020 [...]

  • Pagina 104

    3 - 43 3. CC-LINK CO MMUNI CATION FUNCT IONS (4) Relationship o f remote register (RW w, R W r) The f ollowin g sh ows a r elatio nship between the d evices of the program m able contr oller CPU a nd th e rem ote regis ters ( RW w, RWr) of the r emote de vice st ati ons. Shaded area s ho ws the devic es actu all y used. W100 RWw0 RWw1 RWw2 RWw3 W10[...]

  • Pagina 105

    3 - 44 3. CC-LINK CO MMUNI CATION FUNCT IONS 3.7.2 Readi ng the ser vo am plif ier status W hen the serv o amplif ier o n statio n num ber 1 becom es read y for th e rem ote stati on comm unica tion , Y30 of the out put m odu le tur ns on. The progr am is for turni ng on Y30 whe n CC-Link comm unicat ion is norm al. Checks dat a link s tatus of sta[...]

  • Pagina 106

    3 - 45 3. CC-LINK CO MMUNI CATION FUNCT IONS 3.7.3 W riting the o peration comm ands Perfor m pos ition ing op erat ion of poin t tab le N o.2 for the servo am plif ier of st atio n 2. Start t he o perat ion by tur ning o n X2 0. *1: This is when the h igh-speed t imer limit is se t to 1ms. Setting time for th e timer should be larg er than the com[...]

  • Pagina 107

    3 - 46 3. CC-LINK CO MMUNI CATION FUNCT IONS 3.7.4 Readi ng the d ata Read v arious data of t he se rvo am plif ier. (1) Re ading t h e moni tor value Read the (f eedbac k puls e value) of the serv o amplif ier of station 2 t o D1. Data No. Descri ption H000A Cumulative feedback pulse data (hexadecim al) Read th e cum ulat ive fe edbac k puls e mon[...]

  • Pagina 108

    3 - 47 3. CC-LINK CO MMUNI CATION FUNCT IONS (2) R eading the par am eter Read par am eter N o.PA0 4 "F unctio n sel ectio n A-1 " of th e ser vo am plifier of s tation 2 to D1. Data No. Descri ption H8200 Parameter group selection H2024 Parameter No.PA04 setting (hexadecimal) Read th e param eter No.P A04 b y turnin g on X20. The res pon[...]

  • Pagina 109

    3 - 48 3. CC-LINK CO MMUNI CATION FUNCT IONS (3) R eading the alarm defin ition Read th e al arm definit ion of the servo am plifier of s tati on 2 to D1. Data No. Descri ption H0010 Oc curring alarm/warning No. (hexadec imal) Read c urren t alarm s by turnin g on X 20. The res pond c ode at ins truc tion c ode execu tion is set to D2. Checks da ta[...]

  • Pagina 110

    3 - 49 3. CC-LINK CO MMUNI CATION FUNCT IONS 3.7.5 W riting the d ata This sect ion ex plains the program s f or wri ting v arious data to the s er vo am plifi er. (1) Wr iting the ser vo motor speed da ta of point ta ble Change the s ervo m otor s pee d data in th e poin t tab le No.1 of t he ser vo am plif ier of stat ion 2 to "1 00". T[...]

  • Pagina 111

    3 - 50 3. CC-LINK CO MMUNI CATION FUNCT IONS (2) Wr iting the par am eter The f ollowi ng sho ws a pr ogr am ex am ple when t wo s tations are occupi ed. Change param eter No. PC12 ( JOG s peed) of the ser vo am plif ier of st ation 2 to "100 ". The par am eter gr oup PC is specif ied as fo llows . Code No. Desc ription 8200h Parameter gr[...]

  • Pagina 112

    3 - 51 3. CC-LINK CO MMUNI CATION FUNCT IONS (3) Ser vo am pl ifier alarm resett ing progr am ex am ples (a) D eacti vate th e al arm of the s ervo amplif ier of s tation 2 b y issui ng a c omm and f rom the program m able control ler. Reset the servo am plifi er on the occ urre nce of a serv o alarm by turnin g on X20. Checks data link status of s[...]

  • Pagina 113

    3 - 52 3. CC-LINK CO MMUNI CATION FUNCT IONS 3.7.6 Operat ion This sect ion ex plains the operat ion progr ams of the ser vo am plifier . (1) JO G oper at ion Perfor m J OG op eratio n of the s ervo amplif ier of s tatio n 1 and read the "curr ent p ositi on" dat a. Code No. Des cription H0001 Lower 16-bit dat a of current position (hexad[...]

  • Pagina 114

    3 - 53 3. CC-LINK CO MMUNI CATION FUNCT IONS (2) R emote r egis ter-bas ed p ositi on data /spe ed dat a sett ing The f ollowi ng pro gram exa m ple is on ly ap plic able whe n two st ati ons ar e occ upied . Opera te th e serv o am plifi er of sta tion 2 after s pec if ying th e pos itio n data as "1000 00" and the sp eed dat a as "[...]

  • Pagina 115

    3 - 54 3. CC-LINK CO MMUNI CATION FUNCT IONS (3) R emote r egis ter-bas ed point table No. set ting (incr em ental val ue com m and s ystem ) The f ollowi ng pro gram exa m ple is on ly ap plic able whe n two st ati ons ar e occ upied . Opera te the s erv o am plifi er of stati on 2 with i ncrem ental valu es aft er sp ecif ying th e po int tab le [...]

  • Pagina 116

    3 - 55 3. CC-LINK CO MMUNI CATION FUNCT IONS 3.8 Cont inuous op eration program ex ample This section s hows a pr ogr am example which i nclud es a ser ies of c omm unicat ion op erati ons fr om a s ervo start. The pr ogram will be des crib ed on t he b asis of the equipm ent m ak eup sho wn in s ecti on 3.8. 1, 3. 8.3. 3.8.1 S ystem c onfiguratio [...]

  • Pagina 117

    3 - 56 3. CC-LINK CO MMUNI CATION FUNCT IONS 3.8.2 Pro gram example when 1 st ation is occupied POINT To ex ecute a dog t ype hom e positio n retur n with the C C-Link comm unication functions , set " 0 " in param eter No.PD1 4 and use Proxi mit y dog (DOG) with the rem ote inpu t (RY0 3) in this exam ple. Opera te th e serv o am plifi er[...]

  • Pagina 118

    3 - 57 3. CC-LINK CO MMUNI CATION FUNCT IONS No.selection 1 Positioning start comma nd In posi tio n Rough match Home position return completion Point table No. selection 1 (RY0A) Forward r otation star t (RY01) Reverse rota tion start (R Y02) Point ta ble No. selection 2 (RY0B) Point table No . selection 3 (RY0C) Point table No . selection 4 (RY0D[...]

  • Pagina 119

    3 - 58 3. CC-LINK CO MMUNI CATION FUNCT IONS 3.8.3 S ystem c onfiguratio n exam ple when 2 statio ns are oc cupied As sho wn belo w, the CC-Li nk s ystem m aster local u nit is loaded t o run o ne ser vo am plifi ers (2 s tatio n occupi ed). Input module QX40 (X20 to X2F) Master station QJ61 BT 11 N (X/Y00 to 1F) CPU Q02HCPU Power supply Q62P Progr[...]

  • Pagina 120

    3 - 59 3. CC-LINK CO MMUNI CATION FUNCT IONS 3.8.4 Pro gram example when 2 st ations are occupied POINT To ex ecute a dog t ype hom e positio n retur n with the C C-Link comm unication functions , set " 0 " in param eter No.PD1 4 and use Proxi mit y dog (DOG) with the rem ote inpu t (RY0 3) in this exam ple. Opera te the s erv o am plifi [...]

  • Pagina 121

    3 - 60 3. CC-LINK CO MMUNI CATION FUNCT IONS Position/speed s etting system changing command Position/s peed specifyi ng system sel ection (RY2A) Reads resp ond code (RWr2) to D 2 when position instru ction executi on completio n (RX20) and speed instruction execution com pletion (RX21) t urn on. Positio n and spee d data esta blishm ent time 4ms *[...]

  • Pagina 122

    4 - 1 4. SIGNALS AND WI RING 4. SIGNALS AND W IR ING W ARNING Any pers on who is invol ved in wir ing sho uld be ful ly com petent to do the work . Befor e wiri ng, tur n off the p ower and wai t for 15 m inutes or m ore u ntil the c har ge lamp tur ns off . Then, c onfir m that the volta ge b etwee n P( ) and N( ) is sa fe wit h a volt age t est e[...]

  • Pagina 123

    4 - 2 4. SIGNALS AND WIRING 4.1 Input power supp ly circuit CAUTION Alwa ys con nect a m agnet ic c ontactor (MC) bet ween the m ain circ uit power s uppl y and L 1 , L 2 , an d L 3 of the ser vo am plifier , and co nfigur e the wiring to b e able to s hut down th e po wer su ppl y on the s ide of th e serv o ampl ifie r’s po wer su ppl y. If a m[...]

  • Pagina 124

    4 - 3 4. SIGNALS AND WIRING (2) For 1-phas e 20 0 to 230V AC po wer sup ply to MR-J 3-10T t o MR-J 3-70T DOCOM NFB MC L 1 L 2 L 3 RA P 1 P 2 P SK MC ON OFF MC L 11 L 21 N D C PE U V W 2 3 4 1 CN2 24VDC EMG CN6 CN6 DOCOM DICOM ALM 1-phase 200 to 230VAC Forced stop RA Servo amplifier CNP3 CNP1 U V W (Note 5) CNP2 (Note 1) (Note 2) (Note 3) Encoder ca[...]

  • Pagina 125

    4 - 4 4. SIGNALS AND WIRING (3) MR-J3-10T1 to MR-J3-40T1 NFB MC L 1 Blank L 2 RA P 1 P 2 P SK MC ON OFF MC L 11 L 21 N D C PE U V W 2 3 4 1 M CN2 24VDC 1-phase 100 to 120VAC Servo amplifier CNP1 CNP3 (Note 5) Forced stop RA Ser vo moto r Motor U V W (Note 4) Forced stop DOCOM EMG CN6 CN6 DOCOM DICOM ALM (Note 1) (Note 2) (Note 3) Encoder cable Enco[...]

  • Pagina 126

    4 - 5 4. SIGNALS AND WIRING (4) MR -J3-6 0T4 t o MR-J 3-2 00T4 DOCOM EMG CN6 CN6 DOCOM DICOM ALM Forced stop RA Servo amplifier CNP3 CNP1 U V W (Note 5) CNP2 (Note 1) (Note 2) (Note 3) Encoder cable Enco der Ser vo moto r (Note 4) Forced stop (Note 4) P N NFB MC RA PE U V W 2 3 4 1 M Motor CN2 24VDC Trouble SK MC ON OFF MC (Note 6) Stepdown trans f[...]

  • Pagina 127

    4 - 6 4. SIGNALS AND WIRING (5) MR-J3-500T MR-J3- 700T EMG NFB MC L 1 L 2 L 3 3-phase 200 to 230VAC Servo amplifier ALM RA C DICOM DOCOM P U V W TE1 PE L 11 L 21 TE2 Servo mot or U V W 2 3 4 1 M Motor Encoder CN2 24VDC (Note 3) Encoder cable (Note 5) Troubl e DOCOM Forc ed st op P 1 P 2 N TE3 CN6 CN6 (N ote 1) (Note 2) Built-in regenerative resisto[...]

  • Pagina 128

    4 - 7 4. SIGNALS AND WIRING (6) MR-J 3-350T 4 to MR-J 3-70 0T4 NFB MC 3-phase 380 to 480VAC Servo amplifier RA U V W 2 3 4 1 M Motor Encoder 24VDC (Note 3) Encoder cable (Note 5) Troubl e Forced stop (Note 4) Forced stop RA SK MC ON OFF MC (Note 4) (Note 6) Stepdown transformer EMG L 1 L 2 L 3 ALM C DICOM DOCOM P U V W TE1 PE L 11 L 21 TE2 CN2 DOCO[...]

  • Pagina 129

    4 - 8 4. SIGNALS AND WIRING (7) MR-J3-11KT to MR-J3-22KT NFB MC L 1 L 2 L 3 P C U V W TE PE L 11 L 21 U V W M CN2 (Note 5) P 1 (Note 1) (Note 2) RA2 24VDC power supply OHS2 OHS 1 BU BV BW (Note 6) MC SK MC ON OFF Troub le RA1 3-phase 380 to 480VAC Servo amplifier Dynamic break (Option) Servo m otor Cooling fan Servo m otor thermal relay Servo moto [...]

  • Pagina 130

    4 - 9 4. SIGNALS AND WIRING (8) MR-J3-11KT4 to MR-J3-22KT4 NFB MC L 1 L 2 L 3 P C U V W TE PE L 11 L 21 U V W M CN2 P 1 EMG ALM RA1 DICOM DOCOM 24VDC Troubl e DOCOM CN6 CN6 (Note 4) OHS2 OHS 1 (Note 7) Stepdown transfo rmer MC SK MC ON OFF (Note 5) (Note 1) (Note 2) (Note 6) 3-phase 200 to 230VAC Servo amplifier Dynamic break (Option) Servo m otor [...]

  • Pagina 131

    4 - 10 4. SIGNALS AND WIRING 4.2 I/O s ignal connec tion di agram SD LBR LAR LA LB LZ LZR LG 15 12 25 RA1 RA2 RA3 14 RD ALM 16 ZP CN6 11 24 13 26 1 2 3 Plate 4 5 17 EMG DOG LSP LSN DICOM DOCOM 23 + MR-J3US BCB L3M (Option) CN5 (Note 7) MR Configurato r Pers onal com puter CN1 CC-L ink Encod er A-p hase pulse (dif ferent ial li ne driv er) Encod er [...]

  • Pagina 132

    4 - 11 4. SIGNALS AND WIRING 4.3 Expla nation of power s uppl y system 4.3.1 Sign al expla nations POINT For the la yout of connect or and ter minal b lock , refer to outl ine dra wings in chapter 12. Abbreviati on Connect ion target (Applic ation) Descr ipti on Supply the foll owing power to L 1 , L 2 , L 3 . For the 1-phase 200V to 230VAC power s[...]

  • Pagina 133

    4 - 12 4. SIGNALS AND WIRING 4.3.2 Power -on se quence (1) Po wer-o n proce dure 1) Al ways wire t he po wer su ppl y as sho wn i n abov e sec tion 4.1 us ing t he m agnetic cont act or wit h the main c ircuit po wer su ppl y (three- phase : L 1 , L 2 , L 3 , single-p hase: L 1 , L 2 ). Configur e up an ext erna l sequenc e to s witc h of f the mag[...]

  • Pagina 134

    4 - 13 4. SIGNALS AND WIRING (3) Forced stop CAUTION Provid e an exter nal for ced s top c ircu it to e nsur e tha t oper ation c an be sto pped and power s witc hed of f im media tel y. Make up a circu it that shut s off main cir cuit po wer as s oon as E MG is t urned of f at a f orced s top. W hen EM G is turned off, the dy namic bra ke is ope r[...]

  • Pagina 135

    4 - 14 4. SIGNALS AND WIRING 4.3.3 CNP1, CN P2, CN P3 wiring m ethod POINT Refer to tab le 14.1 i n sectio n 14.9 f or the wire s izes used for wir ing. MR-J3-500T to m ore, MR-J3-350T 4 or m ore does not have th ese con nectors. Use the supp lied servo amplif ier power s uppl y con necto rs f or wirin g of CNP1, C NP2 and CN P3. (1) MR-J3-10T to M[...]

  • Pagina 136

    4 - 15 4. SIGNALS AND WIRING (c) The twin type connector for CNP2 (L 11 L 21 ): 721-2105/ 026- 000 ( W AGO) Using this c onnec tor e nable s pass ing a wire of c ontro l cir cuit p ower supp ly. Refer t o ap pendix 3 f or det ails of c onnec tor. L 21 L 11 L 21 L 11 Power supply or Front axis Rear axis CNP2 Twin type connector for CNP2 (2) MR-J3-20[...]

  • Pagina 137

    4 - 16 4. SIGNALS AND WIRING (c) The twin type connector for CNP2 (L 11 L 21 ): 721-2105/ 026- 000 ( W AGO) Using this c onn ector e nabl es pass ing a wire of c ontro l ci rcuit power supp ly. Refer t o ap pendix 3 f or det ails of c onnec tor. L 21 L 11 L 21 L 11 Power supply or Front axis Rear axis CNP2 Twin type connector for CNP2 (3) MR-J3-350[...]

  • Pagina 138

    4 - 17 4. SIGNALS AND WIRING (4) I nsert ion of cable into Mol ex and W AGO c onnectors Insert ion of cabl e into 549 28-067 0, 5 4928- 0520, 549 28-037 0 (Mo lex) c onnec tors and 72 1-207 /026- 000, 721-20 5/02 6-000 and 7 21-2 03/02 6-000 (W AGO) connec tors ar e as f ollows . The f ollo wing ex plai ns for Mo lex, howe ver use t he s am e proce[...]

  • Pagina 139

    4 - 18 4. SIGNALS AND WIRING 2) Cab le con necti on pr ocedure 1) Attach the ca ble connection lever to the housing. (Detach able) 2) Push the cable connection lever in the direct ion o f ar row. 3) Hold down the ca ble connection lever a nd insert t he cable in the direction of arrow. 4) Release the cable c onnection lever. Cable connection lever[...]

  • Pagina 140

    4 - 19 4. SIGNALS AND WIRING (b) I nsert ing t he ca ble in to t he con nect or 1) Ap plica ble f lat-bl ade sc rew driver dim ensions Alwa ys use the scre wdr iver sho wn here to do th e work . [Unit: mm] 3 0.6 A ppr ox.R0 .3 Approx.22 Appro x.R0.3 3 to 3.5 2) W hen usi ng the f lat- blade scr ewdriver - p art 1 1) Insert the screwdriver into the [...]

  • Pagina 141

    4 - 20 4. SIGNALS AND WIRING 3) W hen usi ng the f lat- blade scr ewdriver - p art 2 1) Insert the screwdriver into the square window a t top of the co nnector . 2) Push the scr ewdriver in the direction of arrow. 3) With the screwdriver pushed, insert the cable in the dire ction of arrow. (Insert t he cable as far as it will go.) 4) Releasing the [...]

  • Pagina 142

    4 - 21 4. SIGNALS AND WIRING (5) How to ins ert the cab le into Phoen ix Contac t conn ector POINT Do not use a precisi on dri ver becaus e the ca ble cann ot be tighte ned with enough tor que. Insert ion of c ables i nto Ph oenix Contac t connec tor PC4/6- STF- 7.62-C RW H or PC4/3- STF- 7.62-C RW H is shown as fol lows. Befor e inser ting t he ca[...]

  • Pagina 143

    4 - 22 4. SIGNALS AND WIRING 4.4 Conn ectors and s ignal arrangem ents POINT The pin c onfigur ations of the conn ectors are as vi ewed f rom the c able connector wir ing section. The s ervo am plif ier f ront vie w sho wn is that of the MR-J 3-20T or les s. R efer t o cha pter 12 O utlin e Dra wings for the app earanc es a nd co nnec tor la youts [...]

  • Pagina 144

    4 - 23 4. SIGNALS AND WIRING 4.5 Signa l (device) expla nation 4.5 .1 I/O device s The CN6 conn ector pr ovid es thr ee pins for in puts an d three other pins for out puts. De vices assi gned to t hese pins are c hangea ble. To m ak e this c hang e, c onfigur e param eter set tings of Nos. PD06 to PD 11, PD12, and PD14. Refer to s ecti on 4. 8.2 f [...]

  • Pagina 145

    4 - 24 4. SIGNALS AND WIRING (1) Input device POINT Input devic es as signed to the CN6 c onnector pins can not be use d with t he rem ote input of the CC- Link comm unication f unction. Device Sym bol Connector pin No. Func tions/Applications Forced st op EMG CN6-1 Forced stop (EMG) is fixed at CN6-1. Assigning this device to an y other pin is not[...]

  • Pagina 146

    4 - 25 4. SIGNALS AND WIRING (2) Output device POINT Output de vices ass igned to the CN6 c onnector p ins ca n be used with the rem ote output of the CC- Link comm unication f unction. Device Sym bol Connector pin No. Func tions/Applications Ready RD CN6-14 (Note) For device details, refer t o section 3.5.1 (2). Trouble ALM CN6-15 (Note) ALM turns[...]

  • Pagina 147

    4 - 26 4. SIGNALS AND WIRING Device Sym bol Connector pin No. Func tions/Applications Zero speed ZSP ZSP turns on when the servo motor speed is zero speed (50r/min) or less. Zero speed can be changed using parameter No.PC17. Example Zero speed is 50r/min OFF ON 0r/ min 1) 3) 2) 4) Forward rotati on direction Servo moto r speed Reverse rotation dire[...]

  • Pagina 148

    4 - 27 4. SIGNALS AND WIRING 4.5.4 Power suppl y Signal Sym bol Connector pin No. Functions/Applicat ions I/O divisi on Digital I/ F power supply input DICOM CN6-5 Used to input 24VDC (24VDC 10% 150m A) for I/O interface. The power supply capacit y changes depending on the number of I/O interfac e points to be used. Connect the plus of 24VDC termi [...]

  • Pagina 149

    4 - 28 4. SIGNALS AND WIRING 4.6.2 Movem ent c ompletio n rough m atch in pos ition POINT If an alar m c ause, etc. are r emoved an d serv o-on occu rs af ter a stop is m ade by servo-of f, alar m oc currence or F orced sto p (EMG ) ON durin g autom atic operation , Movem ent com pletion ( MEND), Rou gh-m atch, (CPO) and In position ( INP) ar e tur[...]

  • Pagina 150

    4 - 29 4. SIGNALS AND WIRING (2) R ough m atch The f ollow ing tim ing c harts sho w the re lat ionsh ips bet wee n the s ignal and t he pos ition c om mand ge nerat ed in th e servo am plifier . This t im ing can b e chan ged us ing p aram eter N o.PC11 ( rou gh m atch out put ran ge). RXn2 tur ns ON in t he ser vo-on st atus. Forwa rd rotation 0r[...]

  • Pagina 151

    4 - 30 4. SIGNALS AND WIRING 4.6.3 T orque lim it CAUTION If the torqu e lim it is c anc eled d uring s ervo l ock , the ser vo m otor m ay sud denl y rotate accor ding to posi tion deviat ion i n respec t to t he c omm and posit ion. (1) Torque l imit and torque By setting parameter No.PA11 (forward rotation torque lim it) or parameter No.PA12 (re[...]

  • Pagina 152

    4 - 31 4. SIGNALS AND WIRING 4.7 Alarm occ urrence tim ing char t CAUTION W hen an alar m has occur re d, rem ove its caus e, m ake s ure th at the o perat ion signa l is n ot bei ng inp ut, e nsure s afe ty, an d res et the alarm befor e res tarting operat ion. As so on as an alar m oc curs , turn off Servo- on (R Yn0) a nd po wer of f. W hen an a[...]

  • Pagina 153

    4 - 32 4. SIGNALS AND WIRING 4.8 Interf ace 4.8.1 Inter nal conn ection d iagram LSN CN6 5 LSP 17 EMG 1 DOG 2 DICOM 3 4 CN6 15 14 RD CN6 13 26 11 24 12 25 LZ LZR LA LAR LB LBR Appro x.5.6k RA RA USB D GND VBUS D 1 2 3 5 CN5 ALM DOCOM 24VDC 3 2 4 7 8 MR MRR MD MDR LG E M CN2 16 ZP 23 LG Servo am plifier <Isolated> Differe ntial line driver out[...]

  • Pagina 154

    4 - 33 4. SIGNALS AND WIRING 4.8.2 Detailed des cription o f interfac es This section prov ides th e det ails of the I/O s ignal int erf aces (r efer to the I/O div ision in the ta ble) given in section 4.5. 1. Ref er to this s ection and mak e connect ion with th e exter nal equipm ent . (1) Digi tal inpu t inte rface DI-1 Give a signa l with a re[...]

  • Pagina 155

    4 - 34 4. SIGNALS AND WIRING (3) Enc oder outp ut p ulse D O-2 (D iff erent ial l ine dr iver s yst em ) (a) Interface Max. o utput c urrent: 35m A LA (LB, L Z) LAR (LBR, LZR) LG SD LA (LB, LZ) LAR (LBR, LZR) SD Servo amplifier Servo amplifier Am26LS32 or equivalent High-speed photocoupler 150 100 (b) Out put pulse Servo motor CCW rotation LA LAR L[...]

  • Pagina 156

    4 - 35 4. SIGNALS AND WIRING 4.8.3 Sour ce I/O interfaces In this s erv o ampl ifier , sour ce t ype I/O i nterfac es c an be us ed. In t his cas e, all DI- 1 input s igna ls and DO-1 outpu t sign als ar e of source t ype. Per form wiring accor ding to th e foll owin g inter face s. (1) Digi tal inpu t inte rface DI-1 EMG, etc. Servo amplifier Swit[...]

  • Pagina 157

    4 - 36 4. SIGNALS AND WIRING 4.9 Treatm ent of cable shie ld ext ernal cond uctor In the ca se of the CN2 an d CN6 conne cto rs, secur ely conne ct the shie lded ex ternal condu ctor of the ca ble to the gr ound p late as sh own i n this sect ion and f ix it to the c onnec tor s hell. External conductor Sheath External conductor Pull back the exter[...]

  • Pagina 158

    4 - 37 4. SIGNALS AND WIRING 4.10 Connec tion of s ervo a mplif ier and ser vo m otor W ARNING Duri ng po wer-on , do no t op en or c lose t he m otor p ower l ine. O ther wise, a ma lfunctio n or f ault y ma y occ ur. 4.10.1 Connec tion ins truct ions W ARNING Insu late the c onnect ions of t he power sup ply term in als t o pre vent an electr ic [...]

  • Pagina 159

    4 - 38 4. SIGNALS AND WIRING 4.10.2 Po wer suppl y cable wirin g diagram s (1) HF-MP service HF-KP series servo motor (a) W hen c able l engt h is 1 0m or less CNP3 AWG 19(red) AWG 19(white) AWG 19(black) AWG 19(green/yellow) W V U Servo motor Servo amplifier 10m or less MR- PWS1 CBL M-A1-L MR- PWS1 CBL M-A2-L MR- PWS1 CBL M-A1-H MR- PWS1 CBL M-A2-[...]

  • Pagina 160

    4 - 39 4. SIGNALS AND WIRING (2) HF-SP series HC-R P series HC-U P series HC-LP ser ies ser vo m otor POINT B Insert a contac t in the d irection s hown in the figur e. If ins erted in th e wrong direction, t he co ntact is dam aged and falls off. Soldered part or crimping part facing up Soldered part or crimping part facing down Pin No.1 Pin No.1 [...]

  • Pagina 161

    4 - 40 4. SIGNALS AND WIRING 2) W hen the power s uppl y con nector and t he e lectrom agn etic br ake c onnect or ar e shar ed. Servo mot or (Note 1) Servo amplifier M U V W B1 B2 U V W 24VDC power supply for electromagnetic brake 50m or less Forced stop (EM G) Troub le (ALM) RA1 24VDC ALM DOCOM DICOM MBR CN3 RA1 RA2 Electromagnetic brake interloc[...]

  • Pagina 162

    4 - 41 4. SIGNALS AND WIRING Encoder c onnector signal allotment CM10-R10P Power supply connect or signal allotment MS3102A18-10P MS3102A22-22P CE05-2A32-17PD-B Power supply connect or signal allotment CE05-2A22-23PD-B Terminal No. Signal Terminal No. Signal Termi nal No. Signal 1 MR A U A U 2 MR R B V B V 3 C W C W 4 BAT 5 LG D (earth) D (eart h) [...]

  • Pagina 163

    4 - 42 4. SIGNALS AND WIRING (3) HA-LP series servo motor (a) W iring diagram s Refe r to se ction 14 .9 for the cabl es used for wi r ing . 1) 200V c lass Ser vo moto r (Note 1) Servo amplifier U V W B1 B2 U V W 24VDC power supply for electromagnetic brake 50m or less Forc ed stop (EMG) Troubl e (ALM) RA1 24VDC ALM DOCOM DICOM MBR CN3 RA1 RA2 El e[...]

  • Pagina 164

    4 - 43 4. SIGNALS AND WIRING 2) 400V c lass Servo motor (Note 1) Servo amplifier U V W B1 B2 U V W 24VDC power supply for electromagnetic brake 50m or less Forced stop (EMG) Trouble (ALM) RA1 24V DC ALM DOCOM DICOM MBR CN3 RA1 RA2 El ec trom ag ne tic br ak e int er loc k (MB R) RA2 RA3 M Cooling fan (Note 2) 24VDC power supply OHS2 OHS1 Servo moto[...]

  • Pagina 165

    4 - 44 4. SIGNALS AND WIRING (b) Servo motor terminal s Terminal box Encoder connector CM10-R10P Brake connector MS3102A10SL-4P Terminal No. Si gnal Terminal No. Signal 1 MR 2 MRR 1 B1 (Note) 3 4 BAT 2 B2 (Note) 5 LG 6 7 8 P5 9 Encoder c onnector signal allotmen t CM10-R10P 5 6 1 4 3 2 8 7 9 10 10 SHD Brake c onnector signal allotmen t MS3102A10SL-[...]

  • Pagina 166

    4 - 45 4. SIGNALS AND WIRING Terminal box inside (HA-LP801(4) 12K1(4) 11K1 M(4) 15K1M(4 ) 15K2( 4) 22K2 (4)) Earth terminal M6 screw Thermal sensor terminal block (OHS1 OHS2) M4 screw Cooling fan terminal block (BU BV BW) M4 screw Encoder connector CM10-R10P Motor power supply terminal block (U V W) M8 screw Term inal block signa l arrangem ent UV [...]

  • Pagina 167

    4 - 46 4. SIGNALS AND WIRING Term inal box in side (HA- LP25K 1) OHS 2 OHS1 BW BV BU W V U Encoder connector CM10-R10P Thermal sensor terminal block Cooling fan terminal block (OHS1 OHS2) M4 screw (BU BV BW) M4 screw Motor power supply terminal block (U V W) M10 screw Earth terminal( ) M6 screw Term inal block signa l arrangem ent BV UV W BU BW OHS[...]

  • Pagina 168

    4 - 47 4. SIGNALS AND WIRING Signal name A bbreviation Des cription Power supply U V W Connect to t he motor output terminals (U, V, W ) of the servo amplifier. During power-on, do not open or close the motor power line. Otherwise, a malfunct ion or faulty may occur. Supply power which satisf ies the following specifications. Serv o motor Volt age [...]

  • Pagina 169

    4 - 48 4. SIGNALS AND WIRING 4.11 Ser vo motor with an el ectrom agnetic brak e 4.11.1 Saf ety prec autions CAUTION Configur e the elec trom agne tic br ake o perat ion c ircui t so th at it is ac tiva ted no t onl y by the s erv o am plifier sign als but als o b y an ext ernal for ced st op si gnal. Contacts must be open w hen servo-off, when an t[...]

  • Pagina 170

    4 - 49 4. SIGNALS AND WIRING 4.11.2 T iming char ts (1) Servo-on (RYn0 ) command (from controller) ON/OFF Tb [m s] after the ser vo-o n (R Yn0) is s witched off , the ser vo lock is r eleas ed a nd the s ervo m otor c oasts. If the elec trom agnet ic brak e is made va lid in t he ser vo lo ck status, the brake l ife m ay be shor ter. Ther ef ore, w[...]

  • Pagina 171

    4 - 50 4. SIGNALS AND WIRING (3) Al arm occurr ence Dynamic b rake Dynamic brake Electromagnetic brake Electromagnetic brake (10ms) (ON) Forward rotati on 0r/ mi n No Yes (OFF) ON OFF ON OFF (Note) (ON) Forward rotati on 0r/ mi n No Yes (OFF) (ON) Yes No (OFF) Electrom agnetic br ake oper ati on de lay ti me Electromagnetic brake interlock (MBR) Se[...]

  • Pagina 172

    4 - 51 4. SIGNALS AND WIRING (5) On ly m ain cir cuit power supp ly of f (c ontrol c ircu it po wer supp l y remains on) RX(n+1)A or R X(n +3 )A Electromagnetic brake Dynamic brake Electromagnetic brake Dynamic b rake Electromagnetic brake Dynamic brake Electromagnetic brake Dynamic b rake (10ms) (Note 1) 15ms or more Electromagnetic brake operatio[...]

  • Pagina 173

    4 - 52 4. SIGNALS AND WIRING 4.11.3 W iring dia gram s (HF-MP ser ies HF-KP series servo motor) POINT For HF-SP se ries HC-RP series HC-UP series HC- LP series s ervo motors , refer to section 4.10.2 (2). (1) W hen c able l engt h is 1 0m or less AWG2 0 AWG2 0 MR-BKS 1CBL M-A1-L MR-BKS 1CBL M-A2-L MR-BKS 1CBL M-A1-H MR-BKS 1CBL M-A2-H (Note 1) B1 B[...]

  • Pagina 174

    4 - 53 4. SIGNALS AND WIRING 4.12 Gro unding W ARNING Groun d the s ervo am pl ifier and s ervo motor sec urel y. To pre vent an elec tric s hock , al ways co nnect t he pr otec tive earth ( PE) t erm inal (term inal m ark ed ) of th e ser vo am plifier with the protec tive earth (PE) of th e contr ol box. The s ervo am plif ier switc he s the po w[...]

  • Pagina 175

    4 - 54 4. SIGNALS AND WIRING MEMO[...]

  • Pagina 176

    5 - 1 5. OPERATION 5. OPERATION W ARNING Do no t oper ate t he s witches with wet hands. You ma y get an e lectr ic sh ock. CAUTION Befor e star ting o perat ion, c hec k the param eters . Som e m achines ma y perf orm unexpec ted o perat ion. Take s afet y measur es, e .g. provide cov ers, to preve nt a ccident al co ntact of ha nds and par ts (c [...]

  • Pagina 177

    5 - 2 5. OPERATION 5.1.2 W iring c heck (1) Power supply system wiring Befor e switc hing on t he m ain circ uit a nd co ntrol c ircu it po wer sup plies , chec k th e foll owin g item s. (a) Power supply system wiring The po wer s uppli ed to t he p ower i nput ter min als ( L 1 , L 2 , L 3 , L 11 , L 21 ) of th e serv o am plifier sh ould s atisf[...]

  • Pagina 178

    5 - 3 5. OPERATION 2) W hen reg enera tive optio n is used over 5kW for 20 0V c lass and 3.5kW f or 400V class The l ead of buil t-in r egen erat ive r esistor conn ected to P term ina l and C term inal of T E1 ter m inal block shou ld not be con nect ed. The ge nerat ive br ake op tion shoul d be c onnec ted to P t erm inal and C term ina l. A twi[...]

  • Pagina 179

    5 - 4 5. OPERATION 5.2 Startup 5.2.1 Power on and of f pr ocedures (1) Power-on Switch po wer on in t he fol lowing proc edure. Alwa ys fo llo w this pr oce dure a t po wer-on. 1) S witch of f the servo- on ( RYn0). 2) Mak e sure that the F orwa rd rotat ion s tart (RYn 1) and Rever se r otati on star t (R Yn2) ar e of f. 3) Swi tch on th e main ci[...]

  • Pagina 180

    5 - 5 5. OPERATION 5.2.3 T est operat ion Befor e star ting ac tual opera tio n, perf orm test op erati on to m ak e sure t hat t he mac hine opera tes nor mal ly. Refer t o sec tion 5. 2.1 f or th e pow er on and of f m ethods of the ser vo amplif ier. Test operat ion of ser vo mot or alone in JO G oper atio n of test operat ion m ode In this s te[...]

  • Pagina 181

    5 - 6 5. OPERATION 5.2.4 Par ameter setting POINT The enc oder cable MR-EK CBL M-L/H for the HF-MP series HF- KP series servo m otor requir es the pa ram eter No.PC22 s etting to be change d depending on its length. C heck whether the param eter is s et correct ly. If it is not set corr ectly, the encod er error 1 ( A16) will occur a t power- on. E[...]

  • Pagina 182

    5 - 7 5. OPERATION 5.2.5 Point table s etting Set nec ess ary i tems to the poi nt tabl e bef ore st art ing op eratio n. T he fo llow ing ta ble in dic ates t he item s that must be set . Name D escri ptio n Position data S et the position data for movement. Servo mot or speed Set the c ommand speed of the servo mot or for executi on of pos itioni[...]

  • Pagina 183

    5 - 8 5. OPERATION 5.3 Serv o amplif ier d ispla y On the ser vo am plifi er dis pla y (three- dig it, se ven-s egm ent dis pla y), ch eck the stat us of com munic atio n with the CC-Link cont roller at po wer- on, ch eck the stat ion numbe r, and diagn ose a faul t at oc currenc e of an a larm . (1) Display sequence Duri ng for ced st op At occurr[...]

  • Pagina 184

    5 - 9 5. OPERATION (2) Indication list Indication S tatus Description b ## W aiting for CC-Link communication Power of the CC-Link mast er module was switc hed on at the condition that the power of CC-Link m aster module is OFF. The CC-Link master m odule is fault y. (Note 1) d ## Ready The s ervo was switc hed on aft er completion of initializat i[...]

  • Pagina 185

    5 - 10 5. OPERATION 5.4 Autom atic op eration m ode 5.4.1 W hat is autom atic operatio n mode? (1) C omm and syst em After s elec tion of pres et po int tab les us ing th e input sig nals or com m unicatio n, ope ration is st arted b y the forwar d rotat ion star t (RYn 1) or revers e rotati on star t (RYn2) . Autom atic o per ation has the abs olu[...]

  • Pagina 186

    5 - 11 5. OPERATION (b) Se lect ion of poi nt tabl e Using the input s igna l or CC -Link , selec t the p oint t able No. with t he rem ote in put a nd rem ote reg ister from the com m and devic e (c ontrol ler) s uch as a per son al com puter . The f ollowi ng ta ble l ists t he po int t able N o. s electe d in r espo nse to the r em ote in put. W[...]

  • Pagina 187

    5 - 12 5. OPERATION 5.4.2 Autom atic operatio n using p oint tabl e (1) Ab solu te va lue com m and s ystem (a) Point table Set t he poi nt tabl e val ues us ing th e MR C onfi gurat or, th e MR-P RU03 param eter unit or the r emote register of CC- Link . Set the pos it ion data , m otor speed , acceler at ion tim e const ant, dec elera tion tim e [...]

  • Pagina 188

    5 - 13 5. OPERATION 2) Rota tion d irec tion s elect ion ( param eter N o.PA1 4) Choose t he ser vo m otor rota tion dir ect ion at t he tim e when t he for ward ro tatio n start ( RYn1) is swit ched on . Parameter No.PA14 set ting Servo m otor rotation direction when forward rotation st art (RYn1) is switched on 0 CC W rotatio n wi th pos ition da[...]

  • Pagina 189

    5 - 14 5. OPERATION (2) Inc rem ental v alue c omman d s y stem (a) Point table Set t he poi nt tabl e val ues us ing th e MR C onfi gurat or, th e MR-P RU03 param eter unit or the r emote register of CC- Link . Set the pos it ion data , m otor speed , acceler at ion tim e const ant, dec elera tion tim e cons tant, d well and auxil iar y funct ion [...]

  • Pagina 190

    5 - 15 5. OPERATION 2) For ward r otati on d irectio n sel ectio n (par ameter No .PA1 4) Choose the ser vo m otor rot ation d irect ion at t he tim e whe n the f orward r otati on sta rt (R Yn1) sig nal or reve rse rota tion start (RYn2) si gnal is swi tched on . Servo motor rotat ion direction Parameter No.PA14 set ting Forward rotat ion start (R[...]

  • Pagina 191

    5 - 16 5. OPERATION (3) Autom atic operat ion tim ing chart The tim ing c hart is s hown belo w. ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF 0r/min ON OFF ON OFF 2 1 ON OFF 12 Automa tic/m anual selection (RYn 6) Servo-on (RYn 0) Forward rota tion star t (RYn1) Reverse rotati on start (RYn2) (Note 1) Point table No. Servo motor s peed Forwar d rotati[...]

  • Pagina 192

    5 - 17 5. OPERATION (4) A utom atic co ntin uous oper ation POINT This function is valid when the poin t table is sel ected u sing t he inpu t signa l or the rem ote input of CC-Link . It cannot b e used when th e point tab le No. is selected using th e rem ote register of CC-Link . (a) W hat is autom atic c ont inuo us oper at ion? By merel y choo[...]

  • Pagina 193

    5 - 18 5. OPERATION 1) Abs olute va lue com m and spec if ying s ystem This system is an auxil iar y functio n for po int t ables t o perf orm autom atic oper ation by spec if ying th e absol ute va lue c omm and or incr ementa l va lue c omm and. Po sition ing i n si ngle dire ction The oper atio n exam ple giv en bel ow ass umes that the set valu[...]

  • Pagina 194

    5 - 19 5. OPERATION Po sition ing that rever ses the dire ction midw a y The oper atio n exam ple giv en bel ow ass umes that the set valu es are as indic ated in the f ollow ing table. H ere, th e point tabl e No.1 us es th e abso lute valu e comm and s ystem , the poi nt tab le No.2 t he increm enta l va lue c omm and s ystem , and the point tabl[...]

  • Pagina 195

    5 - 20 5. OPERATION 2) Inc rem ental val ue com man d s y stem The pos itio n da ta of the inc rem enta l valu e com m and syst em is the s um of the p osit ion d ata of the consec utiv e point t ables . The op erati on exam ple g iven belo w ass umes that t he set values are as in dic ated i n th e follo wing table. Point table No. Position data [[...]

  • Pagina 196

    5 - 21 5. OPERATION (c) T emporar y sto p/restar t W hen RYn7 is tur ned ON durin g aut om atic oper atio n, the mo tor is dec eler ate d to a t em porar y stop a t the dec elera tion tim e co nst ant in th e po int tab le bein g ex ecute d. W hen RYn7 is tu rned O N aga in, the rem aining d ist ance is ex ecuted . If the f orwar d/re vers e rotat [...]

  • Pagina 197

    5 - 22 5. OPERATION 5.4.3 Rem ote regist er-base d positio n/spe ed settin g This operat ion can b e used whe n 2 stat ions are occup ied. T his sec tion ex plain s operat ion to be p erfor med when th e rem ote r egist er is used to sp ecif y the posit ion c omm and data /speed com m and data . (1) Abs olu te va lue com m and pos ition ing i n abs[...]

  • Pagina 198

    5 - 23 5. OPERATION ON OFF ON OFF Servo-on (RYn0) A utomatic/manual selection (RYn6) Speed data (RWwn 6) ON Speed data 2 Speed data 1 Position data (RWwn 4 RWwn 5) Position data 2 Position data 1 OFF Position/speed specifying system selec tion (RY(n 2)A) ON OFF Incremental value/absolute value s election (RY(n 2)B) ON ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF Re[...]

  • Pagina 199

    5 - 24 5. OPERATION (2) I ncrem ental value comm and pos ition ing i n abso lute val ue com mand s ystem The p ositi on d ata set in the abs olute va lue c omm and s ystem are us ed as incr ement al va lues in p osit ionin g. Set t he inp ut dev ices a nd p aram eters as indic ated belo w. Item Us ed device/paramet er Descripti on Automatic operat [...]

  • Pagina 200

    5 - 25 5. OPERATION ON OFF ON OFF ON Speed data 2 Speed data 1 Position data 2 Position data 1 OFF ON OFF ON 6ms or more ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF 3ms or less Incre ment al value data 1 Incremental value data 2 OFF 6ms or more ON ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF (Note 1) (Note 1) 0r/min Forwar d rotati on Reverse rotati on Position data (RWwn 4[...]

  • Pagina 201

    5 - 26 5. OPERATION (3) Pos ition ing i n incr em ental va lue com m and s ystem Execu te posi tioni ng in the i ncrem ental va lue c omm and system . Set the input s igna ls and par am eters as indic ated be lo w. Item Us ed device/paramet er Descripti on Automatic operat ion mode A utomatic/manual selecti on (RYn6) Turn RY n6 ON. Remote register-[...]

  • Pagina 202

    5 - 27 5. OPERATION Forwar d rotati on 0r/min Reverse rotati on ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF Reverse rotation start (RYn2) ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF Speed data 2 Speed data 1 Position data 2 P osition data 1 3ms or less Incremental value data 1 Inc rem en tal value data 2 6ms or mo re (Note 1) 6ms or mo[...]

  • Pagina 203

    5 - 28 5. OPERATION 5.5 Manual operati on m ode For m achin e adj ustm ent, hom e pos ition m atch ing, etc., j og op erati on or a m anual p ulse gener ator m ay be used t o m ake a m otion t o an y posi tion. 5.5.1 JO G operat ion (1) Setting Set the i nput device and p aram eters as follo ws acc ordi ng to th e purpos e of us e. In this c ase, t[...]

  • Pagina 204

    5 - 29 5. OPERATION (4) T iming ch art 100m s ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF 0r/min ON OFF ON OFF Servo-on (RYn0) Ready (RD) Trouble (ALM) Automatic/manual selection (RYn6) Rough match (RXn2) Servo motor speed Forward rotation start (RYn1) Reverse rotation start (RYn2) Forw ard rotati on jog Reverse rotatio n jog Forward rotation Reverse[...]

  • Pagina 205

    5 - 30 5. OPERATION (3) Ma nual pulse ge nerato r multi plication (a) Using the parameter for setting Use par ameter No.P A05 to set t he m ultip licat ion ra tio of the s ervo m otor r otat ion to t he m anual pulse genera tor rot atio n. Parameter No.PA05 set ting Multipli cation ratio of servo motor rotati on to manual pulse generator rot ation [...]

  • Pagina 206

    5 - 31 5. OPERATION 5.6 Manual hom e position return m ode 5.6.1 Outl ine of hom e pos ition retur n Home pos it ion ret urn is per form ed to matc h th e comm and coor din ates wi th the m achin e co ordinates . I n the increm enta l syst em , home pos itio n ret urn is requ ired ever y tim e input po wer is switc hed o n. In t he abso lut e posit[...]

  • Pagina 207

    5 - 32 5. OPERATION (1) Home position return types Choose the optim um home pos it ion re turn ac cord ing t o the mac hine t ype, etc. Type Home position return method Features Dog type home position return With decelerat ion started at the front end of a proximity dog, the position where the first Z-phase signal is given past the rear end of the [...]

  • Pagina 208

    5 - 33 5. OPERATION (2) Home position return parameter W hen perfor ming hom e posit ion re turn, s et eac h par ameter as f ollo ws. (a) C hoose the hom e pos iti on ret urn m ethod with p aram eter No. PC02 ( Hom e pos ition r eturn t ype). 0 Pa ram et e r No. PC 02 00 Home position return method 0: Dog type 1: Count type 2: Da ta s etting typ e [...]

  • Pagina 209

    5 - 34 5. OPERATION 5.6.2 Dog t ype hom e position r eturn A home pos it ion ret urn m ethod us ing a prox im ity dog. W ith deceler ation s tarte d at the f ront en d of the pr oxim ity dog, t he pos ition wher e the f irst Z- phase s igna l is g iven p ast t he rear end of the dog or a m otion has bee n made o ver th e hom e pos itio n shif t dis[...]

  • Pagina 210

    5 - 35 5. OPERATION (3) T iming ch art ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF td ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF 0 Selected point table No. Rough match (RXn2) Servo motor s peed Z-phase Proximity dog (DOG) Forward rotation start (RYn1) Home position 6ms or mor e 3ms or less Reverse rotation start (RYn2) 0r/min Automatic/manual selection (RYn6) Forw ard rotation P[...]

  • Pagina 211

    5 - 36 5. OPERATION 5.6.3 Count t ype hom e position return In coun t t ype hom e posit ion ret urn , a moti on is m ade over t he dis tance s et in param eter N o.PC 08 (m ovin g distanc e after prox imit y dog) af ter detec tion of th e prox im ity dog f ront end. T he posi tion wh ere the f irst Z-p hase signa l is gi ven af ter tha t is def ine[...]

  • Pagina 212

    5 - 37 5. OPERATION (2) T iming ch art 0r/min Forward rotation ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF 0 ON OFF ON OFF Rough m atch (RXn2) Servo motor speed Z-pha se Proximity dog (DOG) Forward rotation start (RYn1) 6ms or more 3ms or les s Home position Reverse rotation start (RYn2) Sele cted po int tab le No. Automatic/manual selection (RYn6) P[...]

  • Pagina 213

    5 - 38 5. OPERATION 5.6.4 Dat a setting type hom e positio n retur n Data set ting t ype hom e positi on retur n is used when it is des ire d to deter mine an y posit ion as a hom e pos ition. JOG op erati on can be used for m ovem ent. (1) Devices, para meters Set th e input device s and paramet ers a s follows. Item Devi ce/Param eter used Descri[...]

  • Pagina 214

    5 - 39 5. OPERATION 5.6.5 St opper t ype hom e position ret urn In stopp er type hom e position r eturn , a m achine part is pres sed ag ainst a st opper or the lik e by jo g operat ion to mak e a hom e pos ition r etur n and that p ositi on is define d as a hom e posi tion. (1) Devices, para meters Set th e input device s and paramet ers a s follo[...]

  • Pagina 215

    5 - 40 5. OPERATION (2) T iming ch art 6ms or mo re Parameter No.PC35 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF (Note 3 ) Parameter No.PC 10 Pa rameter No .PC35 0 ON OFF Rough match (RYn2) Serv o mot or sp eed Forward rotation start (RYn1) Automatic/manual selection (RYn6) Limiting torque (RYn4) Torq ue limi t value Reverse rotation start (RYn2 ) 0[...]

  • Pagina 216

    5 - 41 5. OPERATION 5.6.6 Hom e posit ion ignor ance ( servo-o n positi on def ined as hom e posit ion) The pos ition wh ere ser vo is sw itche d on is defi ned as a hom e posit ion. POINT W hen executing th is hom e posit ion return, c hang ing to the hom e position return m ode is n ot necess ary. (1) Devices, paramete r Set the inp ut dev ices a[...]

  • Pagina 217

    5 - 42 5. OPERATION 5.6.7 Dog t ype rear end ref erence hom e positi on return POINT This home pos ition retur n m ethod depends o n the t iming of reading Proxim ity dog (DOG) that has detected th e rear end of a pr oxim ity dog. Henc e, if a home pos ition ret urn is m ade at the creep sp eed of 100r/m in, an err or of 400 pulses will occ ur in t[...]

  • Pagina 218

    5 - 43 5. OPERATION (2) T iming ch art ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF Automatic/manual selection (RYn6) Rough match (RXn2) Servo moto r speed Proximity dog (DOG) Forward rotation start (RYn1) Home position return spee d Creep speed Movi ng d ist ance af ter prox imi ty do g Home positi on shift di stance 6ms or mo re 3ms or less R[...]

  • Pagina 219

    5 - 44 5. OPERATION 5.6.8 Count t ype f ront end r eferenc e hom e position return POINT This home pos ition retur n m ethod depends o n the t iming of reading Proxim ity dog (DOG) that has detected th e front en d of a pr oxim ity dog. He nce, if a home pos ition ret urn is m ade at the hom e position retur n speed of 100r/m in, an error of 400 p [...]

  • Pagina 220

    5 - 45 5. OPERATION (2) T iming ch art ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF Automati c/manual selection (RYn6) Roug h m atc h (R Xn 2) Servo motor speed Proximity dog (DOG) For war d ro tat ion st art (RY n1 ) Home position return speed Creep speed Moving distance after proximity dog Home position shift di stance 6ms o r m ore 3ms or le[...]

  • Pagina 221

    5 - 46 5. OPERATION 5.6.9 Dog c radle t ype home pos ition r eturn The pos itio n wher e the f irst Z -phas e sign al is is sued after d etec tion of the pr oxim it y dog f ron t end c an be define d as a hom e posi tion. (1) Devices, para meters Set t he inp ut dev ices a nd p aram eters as indic ated belo w. Item Devi ce/Param eter used Descripti[...]

  • Pagina 222

    5 - 47 5. OPERATION (2) T iming ch art ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF Automatic /manual selection (RYn6) Rough match (RXn2) Servo moto r speed Proximity dog (DOG) Forward rotation start (RYn1) Home posi tion re turn speed Creep s peed Home position shif t distance 6ms or mor e 3ms or less Reverse rotation start (RYn2) Selected poi[...]

  • Pagina 223

    5 - 48 5. OPERATION 5.6.10 Dog t ype f irst Z-pha se ref erence hom e posit ion return After t he prox im ity dog f ront e nd is det ected, t he cu rrent posit ion m oves in the rever se dir ecti on at cre ep speed. After t his movin g aw ay from the pr oxim it y dog, t he hom e pos itio n is det erm ined to be where t he fir st Z- phase pu lse is [...]

  • Pagina 224

    5 - 49 5. OPERATION (2) T iming ch art Forward rotation 0r/min Reverse rotation ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF Automatic/manual selection (RYn6) Rough match (RXn2) Servo motor speed Proximit y dog (DOG) Forward rotation start (RYn1) Home position return speed Creep speed Home position shift di stance 6ms or more 3ms or less Revers[...]

  • Pagina 225

    5 - 50 5. OPERATION 5.6.11 Dog t ype f ront end ref erence hom e posit ion ret urn m ethod The hom e p osition is d eter mined t o be the pos it ion of the f ront end of the pr oxim it y dog. (1) Devices, para meters Set t he inp ut dev ices a nd p aram eters as indic ated belo w. Item Devi ce/Param eter us ed Desc ription Automatic/m anual selecti[...]

  • Pagina 226

    5 - 51 5. OPERATION (2) T iming ch art Forward rotati on 0r /min Reverse rotati on ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF Automatic /manual selection (RYn6) Rough match (RXn2) Servo moto r speed Proximity dog (DOG) Forward rotation start (RYn1) Home position retu rn speed 6ms or mor e 3ms or less Reverse rotation start (RYn2) Selected poi[...]

  • Pagina 227

    5 - 52 5. OPERATION 5.6.12 Dogl ess Z- phase refer ence hom e positi on return m ethod The hom e p osition is de ter mined t o be where the f irst Z-ph ase pu lse is iss ued af ter the hom e pos itio n retur n is starte d. (1) Devices, para meters Set t he inp ut dev ices a nd p aram eters as indic ated belo w. Item Devi ce/Param eter us ed Desc ri[...]

  • Pagina 228

    5 - 53 5. OPERATION (2) T iming ch art Forward rotati on 0r /min Reverse rotati on ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF Automatic /manual selection (RYn6) Rough match (RXn2) Servo moto r speed Z-phas e Forward rotation start (RYn1) Home position retu rn speed 6ms or mor e 3ms or less Reverse rotation start (RYn2) Selected point table No[...]

  • Pagina 229

    5 - 54 5. OPERATION 5.6.13 Hom e posit ion retur n autom atic r eturn func tion If the cur rent pos it ion is a t or be yond the pr oxim it y dog in th e hom e positio n retur n us ing the pr oxim it y dog, this functi on star ts hom e p ositio n ret urn af ter m aking a retur n to th e pos itio n wher e the hom e pos itio n retur n ca n be made. ([...]

  • Pagina 230

    5 - 55 5. OPERATION 5.6.14 Autom atic pos itioni ng f unction to t he hom e posit ion POINT You cann ot perf orm autom atic pos itioning f rom outside the positio n data setting r ange to th e hom e position. I n this case, m ake a hom e posit ion return again us ing a m anual hom e posi tion ret urn. If this f unct ion is us ed whe n retu rnin g t[...]

  • Pagina 231

    5 - 56 5. OPERATION 5.7 Roll f eed displ ay func tion in r oll feed m ode W ith the roll f eed dis pla y functi on, th e servo am plifier can oper ate in the ro ll fee d mode. T he ro ll feed m ode uses t he inc rem ental s ystem . (1) Paramete r settings No. Nam e Digit to be set Setting item Setting value Descr ipt ion PA03 Absolute p ositio n de[...]

  • Pagina 232

    5 - 57 5. OPERATION 5.8 Absolute pos ition detec tion s ystem CAUTION If an absol ute pos itio n er ase a larm (A25) or an a bso lute posit ion c ounter war ning (AE3) has oc curre d, a lways perf orm home pos itio n se tting again. Not doin g so ma y cause u nexpec ted o perati on. POINT If the encoder cab le is disconnect ed, absol ute positio n [...]

  • Pagina 233

    5 - 58 5. OPERATION (3) Structure Component Descri ption Servo amplifi er Servo motor Use stand ard models. Battery MR-J3BAT Encoder cable Use a stan dard model. (Refer to se ction 1 4.1.) (4) Outl ine of absolut e posit ion detec tion da ta com munic at ion For norm al o perat ion, as shown b elo w, the enc oder c ons ists of a detect or de signe [...]

  • Pagina 234

    5 - 59 5. OPERATION (a) For MR-J 3-350T or l ess MR-J 3-20 0T4 or less POINT For the ser vo am plifier with a ba ttery hold er on t he bottom , it is not possib le to wire for the earth wit h the b attery inst alled . Insert the batter y after execut ing the earth wiring of the ser vo am plifier. Insert con nector into CN4. (b) For MR-J3-500T or mo[...]

  • Pagina 235

    5 - 60 5. OPERATION MEMO[...]

  • Pagina 236

    6 - 1 6. PARAMETERS 6. PARAME TERS CAUTION Ne ver adj ust or chan ge th e param eter valu es extr em ely as it wil l mak e oper ation instab le. POINT For an y parameter whose s y m bol is preceded by *, set the par ameter value and switc h power of f once, then sw itch it o n again to m ak e that param eter setting v alid. In this s ervo am plifie[...]

  • Pagina 237

    6 - 2 6. PARAMETERS 6.1.2 Par am eter write inhi bit Para m eter No. Symbol Nam e Initial value Unit Setting range PA19 *BLK Param eter write inhibit 000Ch Refer to the text. POINT This param eter is m ade valid when po wer is s witched o ff, then o n after setting. In the factor y s etting, this ser vo am plifier a llows c hang es to t he bas ic s[...]

  • Pagina 238

    6 - 3 6. PARAMETERS 6.1.3 Selec tion of com mand s ystem Parameter No. Symbol Nam e Initial value Unit Setting range PA01 *S TY Control m ode 0000h Refer t o the text. POINT This param eter is m ade valid when po wer is s witched o ff, then o n after setting. Selec t the comm and s yste m. Selection of command system (Refer to section 5.4 ) 0: Abso[...]

  • Pagina 239

    6 - 4 6. PARAMETERS 6.1.5 Usin g absolut e position d etection s ystem Para m eter No. Symbol Nam e Initial value Unit Setting range PA03 *ABS Absolute positi on detection system 0000h Refer to the text. POINT This param eter is m ade valid when po wer is s witched o ff, then o n after setting. Set this p aram eter wh en using the absol ute pos iti[...]

  • Pagina 240

    6 - 5 6. PARAMETERS 6.1.7 Feed ing f unction s elec tion Para m eter No. Symbol Nam e Initial value Unit Setting range PA05 *FTY Feeding functi on selection 0000h Ref er to the text. POINT This param eter is m ade valid when po wer is s witched o ff, then o n after setting. Selec t the feed lengt h m ultipl icati on and the m anual puls e gen erato[...]

  • Pagina 241

    6 - 6 6. PARAMETERS 6.1.8 Elec tronic ge ar Para m eter No. Symbol Nam e Initial value Unit Setting range PA06 *CMX El ectronic gear numerator 1 0 to 65535 PA07 *CDV Electroni c gear denominator 1 1 to 65535 CAUTION Fals e se tting will r esult in un expec ted f ast ro tation , caus ing i njury. POINT This param eter is m ade valid when po wer is s[...]

  • Pagina 242

    6 - 7 6. PARAMETERS (b) C onve yor sett ing ex am ple Machi ne spec if icati ons Pulle y diam eter: r 160 [m m] Reduct ion ra tio: n 1/3 Servo motor re solution: Pt 262144 [puls e/rev] Servo m otor 262 144 [p ul se/ re v] r=160[mm] n NM NL n=NL/NM=1/3 CMX CDV p t S 32768 20944 167551.61 262144 p t 262144 n r 1000 1/3 160 1000 Reduce CMX a nd CD V t[...]

  • Pagina 243

    6 - 8 6. PARAMETERS (2) Aut o tun ing r espons e (p aram eter No. PA09) If the mac hine hu nts or gen erat es lar ge g ear s ound, d ecr ease th e set value . To impro ve p erform ance, e.g. short en the s ettli ng t ime, i ncreas e the s et v alue. Setting Res ponse Guideline for machine resonance f requency [ Hz] Setting Res ponse Guideli ne for [...]

  • Pagina 244

    6 - 9 6. PARAMETERS 6.1.11 T orque lim it Parameter No. Symbol Nam e Initial value Unit Setting range PA11 TLP Forward rotation torque limit 100.0 % 0 t o 100.0 PA12 TLN Reverse rotation torque limit 100.0 % 0 t o 100.0 The torqu e genera ted b y the servo motor can be l imited . (1) For ward rotat ion tor que lim it (param eter N o.P A11) Set t hi[...]

  • Pagina 245

    6 - 10 6. PARAMETERS 6.1.12 Sel ection of servo m otor rota tion d irectio n Parameter No. Symbol Nam e Initial value Unit Setting range PA14 *POL Rotation direct ion selection 0 0 1 POINT This param eter is m ade valid when po wer is s witched o ff, then o n after setting. Selec t ser vo m otor ro tation dir ection rela tive t o th e in put puls e[...]

  • Pagina 246

    6 - 11 6. PARAMETERS (1) F or outpu t pul se designat ion Set " 0 " (ini tial valu e) in pa ramet er No.P C19. Set t he num ber of puls es p er ser vo m otor r evolu tion. Output puls e set value [pulse s/rev ] For ins tanc e, s et "560 0" t o Par ameter No. PA15, the ac tua lly outp ut A /B-ph ase pu lses are as ind icate d bel[...]

  • Pagina 247

    6 - 12 6. PARAMETERS 6.2 Gain/f ilter par am eters (No.PB ) 6.2.1 Par am eter list No. Sy m bol Name Initial value Unit PB01 FI LT A daptive tuning m ode (Adapti ve filter ) 0000h PB02 VRFT V ibration s uppression cont rol tuning mode (Advanced vibration s uppression control) 0000h PB03 For manuf acturer setting 0000h PB04 FFC Feed forward gain 0 %[...]

  • Pagina 248

    6 - 13 6. PARAMETERS 6.2.2 Detai l list No. Symbol Name and function I nitial value Unit Setting range PB01 FILT Adaptive tuning m ode (Adapti ve filter ) Select t he setting m ethod for f ilter tuning. Setting this parameter to " 1" (filt er tuning mode 1) automatically changes the machine resonance suppression f ilter 1 (parameter No.PB[...]

  • Pagina 249

    6 - 14 6. PARAMETERS No. Symbol Name and function Ini tial value Unit S etting range PB02 VRFT Vibration s uppression cont rol tuning mode (Advanced vi bration suppress ion control) The vibration suppressi on is valid w hen the param eter No.PA08 (auto tuning) setting is " 2" or " 3" . When PA08 is " 1", vibration supp[...]

  • Pagina 250

    6 - 15 6. PARAMETERS No. Symbol Name and function Initial value Unit Setting range PB05 For manuf acturer setting Do not change this value by any means. 500 PB06 GD2 Rat io of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment Used t o set the ratio of the l oad inertia m oment to the s ervo mot or shaft inertia moment. W hen auto tuning m ode 1 and[...]

  • Pagina 251

    6 - 16 6. PARAMETERS No. Symbol Nam e and function Initial value Unit Setting range PB14 NHQ1 Notch s hape selecti on 1 Used to selection the machi ne resonance suppression filter 1. Notch depth selection Settin g value Depth Gain 0- 4 0 d B Deep 1- 1 4 d B 2 -8dB 3 -4dB Shallow Notch width Settin g value Width 02 S tandard 13 24 35 Wide 00 to to S[...]

  • Pagina 252

    6 - 17 6. PARAMETERS No. Symbol Name and function Initial value Unit Set ting range PB18 LPF Low -pass filter Set the low-pass filt er. Setting paramet er No.PB23 (low-pass filter selecti on) to " 0 " automatical ly changes this parameter. When parameter No.PB 23 is set to " 1 ", this param eter can be set manually. 3141 rad/s 1[...]

  • Pagina 253

    6 - 18 6. PARAMETERS No. Symbol Nam e and function I nitial value Unit S etting range PB25 For manuf acturer setting Do not change this value by any means. 0000h PB26 *CDP Gai n changing selection Select t he gain c hanging condition. (Ref er to sect ion 10.6.) Gain ch anging selecti on Under any of the f ollowing conditions, the gains change on th[...]

  • Pagina 254

    6 - 19 6. PARAMETERS No. Symbol Nam e and function I nitial value Unit S etting range PB33 V RF1B Gain changi ng vibration suppression control vibrat ion frequency setting Set the vibratio n frequency for vibration suppres sion control when the gain changing is vali d. This para meter is made valid when the parameter No.PB02 setting is " 2&quo[...]

  • Pagina 255

    6 - 20 6. PARAMETERS 6.3 Extens ion sett ing par am eters (N o.PC ) 6.3.1 Par am eter list No. Sym bol Nam e and function I nitial value Unit PC01 For manuf acturer setting 0000h PC02 *ZTY Home po siti on r eturn type 0000h PC03 *ZDIR Home pos itio n re tur n d ire ction 0001h PC 04 ZR F Hom e position ret urn speed 500 r/min PC 05 C RF Creep speed[...]

  • Pagina 256

    6 - 21 6. PARAMETERS No. Symbol Name and function Initial value Unit PC49 0000h PC50 For manuf acturer setting 0000h 6.3.2 Detai l list No. S ymbol Nam e and function I nitial value Unit Setting range PC01 For manufacturer s etting Do not change this value by any means. 0000h PC02 *ZTY Home pos ition return t ype Used to s et the home pos ition ret[...]

  • Pagina 257

    6 - 22 6. PARAMETERS No. Sym bol Name and function Initia l value Unit Set ting range PC10 ZTT Stopper type hom e posit ion return torque li mit value Used to s et the torque lim it value re lative to t he max. torque in [ %] in stopper type home pos ition ret urn. (R ef er to s ect io n 5 .6 .5. ) 15.0 % 1 to 100.0 PC11 CRP Rough mat ch output ran[...]

  • Pagina 258

    6 - 23 6. PARAMETERS No. Sym bol Name and function Initia l value Unit Set ting range PC19 *ENRS Encoder output pulse select ion Use to select the, encoder out put pulse direction and encoder output pulse sett ing. 00 Servo motor rotation dir ection Set value CCW CW 0 1 A-ph ase B-phase A-phase B-phase A-ph ase B-phase A-phase B-phase Encoder outpu[...]

  • Pagina 259

    6 - 24 6. PARAMETERS No. Sym bol Nam e and function Initial value Unit Setting range PC23 For m anufacturer s etting Do not change this value by any means. 0000h PC24 *COP3 Functi on selection C-3 Select the unit of the in-pos ition range. In-position range unit selection 0: Command input unit 1: Servo mo tor encoder unit 000 0000h Refer to name an[...]

  • Pagina 260

    6 - 25 6. PARAMETERS No. Sym bol Nam e and function In itial value Unit Setting range PC29 For m anufacturer s etting Do not change this value by any means 0000h PC 30 * DS S Rem ote regis ter-based pos ition/s peed speci fying sys tem select ion This param eter is made vali d when Posi tion/speed spec ific ation select ion (RY(n 2)A) is turned ON [...]

  • Pagina 261

    6 - 26 6. PARAMETERS No. Sym bol Nam e and function Initial value Unit Setting range PC37 * LPPL PC38 * LPPH Posit ion range output addr ess Used to s et the address inc rement side position range out put addres s. Set the same s ign to paramet ers No.PC37 and PC38. S etting of different signs will result in a para meter erro r. In param eters No.P[...]

  • Pagina 262

    6 - 27 6. PARAMETERS 6.3.3 S-p attern ac celera tion/dece leration In ser vo op erati on, li near ac celer ation/ dec elerati on is us uall y made. By s etting the S-pat tern acc eler ation/ decel eratio n tim e cons tant ( param eter No .PC13) , a sm ooth start/s top c an b e made. W hen the S-pat tern t ime const ant is set, s m ooth pos ition in[...]

  • Pagina 263

    6 - 28 6. PARAMETERS 6.3.6 Soft ware lim it A lim it stop us ing a s oft ware lim it (par am eter No. PC31 to PC34) is m ade as in s trok e end op erati on. W hen a motion goes be yond the s etting range , the m otor is s topp ed and s erv o-lock ed. T his f unction is m ade va lid a t power- on bu t m ade in valid dur ing hom e posi tion re turn .[...]

  • Pagina 264

    6 - 29 6. PARAMETERS 6.4 I/O setti ng param eters (No.PD ) 6.4.1 Par am eter list No. Sy m bol Name Initial value Unit PD 01 *D I A1 Input signal autom atic ON selec tion 1 0000h PD02 For manuf acturer setting 0000h PD03 *DIA3 I nput s ignal automatic ON selecti on 3 0000h PD04 *DIA4 I nput s ignal automatic ON selecti on 4 0000h PD05 For manuf act[...]

  • Pagina 265

    6 - 30 6. PARAMETERS 6.4.2 Detai l list No. Symbol Name and function Initial value Unit Setting range PD01 *DIA1 I nput signal automatic ON s election 1 Select the input devic es to be automatically turned ON. part is for manufacturer s etting. Do not set the value by any means. 0 0 0 Initial val ue BIN HEX Device name 0 0 Initial value BIN HEX Pro[...]

  • Pagina 266

    6 - 31 6. PARAMETERS No. Sym bol Nam e and function Initial value Unit Set ting range PD03 *DIA3 Input signal autom atic ON selecti on 3 Select t he input devi ces to be automatically turned ON. part is for manufacturer s etting. Do not set the value by any means. 0 Initi al value BIN HEX Device name 0 Automatic/manual selection (MD0) 0 0 0 0 0 0 B[...]

  • Pagina 267

    6 - 32 6. PARAMETERS No. Sym bol Nam e and function Initial value Unit Set ting range PD06 *DI2 Output signal devic e selection 2 (CN6-2) Any input device can be assigned to t he CN6-2 pin. 0 Select the input device o f the CN6-2 pin 0 The devic es that can be assigned are indicated i n the following table. Input device Setting (Note) Name Abbrevi [...]

  • Pagina 268

    6 - 33 6. PARAMETERS No. Sym bol Nam e and function Initial value Unit Setting range PD09 *DO1 Output signal device selection 1 (CN6-14) Any output signal can be assigned to the CN6-14 pin. 0 Select the output device of the CN6-14 pin 0 The devic es that can be assigned are indicated i n the following table. Output device Setting (Note) Na me S y m[...]

  • Pagina 269

    6 - 34 6. PARAMETERS No. Sym bol Nam e and function Initial value Unit S etting range PD11 *DO3 Output signal device selection 3 (CN6-16) Any output signal can be assigned to the CN6-16 pin. The devic es that can be assigned and the setting m ethod are the s ame as i n paramet er No.PD09. 0 Select the output device of the CN6-16 pin 0 0024h Ref er [...]

  • Pagina 270

    6 - 35 6. PARAMETERS No. Sym bol Nam e and function Initial value Unit Setti ng range PD14 DIN3 External DI f unction selection 3 This function sets any signal import ed from the CN6 connector. part is for manufacturer s etting. Do not set the value by any means. 8 Initi al value BIN HE X Device name 0 0 0 1 BIN 0: Used in CC-Link BIN 1: Used in CN[...]

  • Pagina 271

    6 - 36 6. PARAMETERS No. Sym bol Name and function Initial value Unit S etting range PD20 *DOP1 Functi on selection D-1 Select t he stop processing at f orward rotat ion stroke end (LSN)/reverse rotation stroke end (LSN) OFF and the base circuit stat us at reset (RY(N 1)A or RY(n 3)A) ON . Stopping method used when forward rotation stroke end (LSP)[...]

  • Pagina 272

    6 - 37 6. PARAMETERS No. Sym bol Name and function Initial value Uni t S etting range PD24 *DOP5 Functi on selection D-5 Select the out put status of the warning (WNG). 00 0 Selection of output device at warning occurrence Select the warning (RXnA) and t rouble (RX(n+1)A or RX(n+3)A) output status at warning occurrence. 0 1 Setting (Note ) De vice [...]

  • Pagina 273

    6 - 38 6. PARAMETERS 6.4.3 St opping m ethod when the forward strok e end (L SP) or re verse str oke end (LSN) is vali d The s etting of t he f irst digit of par am eter No. PD20 enab les t o s elect a sto pping m ethod of the serv o motor when th e for ward r otation str oke end ( LSP) or re verse r otation strok e end (LSN) turns off. Stopping me[...]

  • Pagina 274

    6 - 39 6. PARAMETERS 6.4.4 St opping m ethod when a sof tware limit is detect ed A stop ping m etho d of th e ser vo m otor wh en a soft ware l imit (p aram eter No .PC31 t o PC 34) is detec ted can b e selec ted. T he s oft ware l imit im poses a lim it o n the com m and posit ion, which is c ont rolle d in the ser vo amplif ier . Theref ore, act [...]

  • Pagina 275

    6 - 40 6. PARAMETERS MEMO[...]

  • Pagina 276

    7 - 1 7. MR Confi g urato r 7. MR Con figurator The MR Conf igurator uses the c omm unication functio n of the servo am plif ier to pe rform parameter setting changes, graph d ispla y, test opera tion, e tc. on a p ersonal c omputer . 7.1 Specific atio ns Item De script ion The following table shows MR Configurator s oftware version for each servo [...]

  • Pagina 277

    7 - 2 7. MR Config urator 7.2 System configurat ion (1) C ompone nts To us e this sof twar e, the f ollo wing c ompone nts are req uired in ad dition to the s ervo am plif ier an d ser vo mot or . Equipm ent (Note 1) Desc ription OS IBM PC/AT compatible where the English version of Windows R 98, W indows R Me, Windows R 2000 Profess ional, Windows [...]

  • Pagina 278

    7 - 3 7. MR Config urator (2) C onnect ion wi th ser vo a m plifier (a) For use of USB To US B connector USB cable MR-J3USBCBL3M (Option) Personal computer Servo amplifier CN5 (b) For use of RS- 422 To RS -232C connector RS-422/232C conversion cable DSV-CABV (Di at ren d) Personal computer Servo amplifier CN3 (c) F or use of RS- 422 t o mak e m ult[...]

  • Pagina 279

    7 - 4 7. MR Config urator 7.3 Station selectio n Click "Set up" on the m enu bar a nd cl ick "Syst em s ettings " on th e m enu. W hen the ab ove c hoices are m ade, the fo llow ing wi ndow a ppears . a) (1) St ation nu mber sel ecti on Choose the st atio n num ber i n the com bo box ( a) ). POINT This setting s hould b e the sa[...]

  • Pagina 280

    7 - 5 7. MR Config urator 7.4 Param eters Click "Param eter s" on the m en u bar and c lick "Param ete r list " on t he m enu. W hen the ab ove c hoices are m ade, the fo llow ing wi ndow a ppears . g) h) i ) j) k) l) c) a) f) b) d) e) (1) Parameter value write ( a) ) Click the parameter whose s etting was changed an d press the[...]

  • Pagina 281

    7 - 6 7. MR Config urator (4) Parameter value bat ch-write ( d) ) Click the "W r ite All" b utto n to write a ll param eter valu es to t he ser vo am plif ier . (5) Parameter default value indication ( e) ) Click the " Set to defa ult" b utton to s how the in itia l val ue of eac h param eter . (6) Basi c settings for parameters[...]

  • Pagina 282

    7 - 7 7. MR Config urator 7.5 Point table POINT The valu e of the par am eter No. PA05 set o n the para m eter setting sc reen is not engage d with the ST M (feed lengt h multip licatio n) value on the point tab le list sc reen. Set t he ST M (feed len gth m ultiplica tion) value to t he sam e as s et in the par ameter No. PA05 on the p oint table [...]

  • Pagina 283

    7 - 8 7. MR Config urator (5) Poi nt table da ta in sertion ( e) ) Click the " Insert " but ton t o inser t o ne block of data into the pos it ion bef ore t he p oint ta ble No. ch osen. T he block s af ter the ch osen poin t table No. ar e shif ted down one b y one. (6) Poi nt table da ta del etio n ( f) ) Click th e "De lete" [...]

  • Pagina 284

    7 - 9 7. MR Config urator 7.6 Devic e assignm ent m ethod POINT To us e a devic e as an ext ernal I/O s ignal, the s etting s for the param eter No. PD12 and PD14 are requi red after the dev ice is assigned accordin g to th e device s etting des crib ed be low. (1) H ow to op en t he sett ing s creen Click "Param eter s" o n the m en u ba[...]

  • Pagina 285

    7 - 10 7. MR Config urator (2) Scr een exp lanati on (a) DIDO dev ice sett ing windo w scree n This is the de vice ass ignm ent scr een of the serv o am plifier disp la y s the p in ass ignm ent sta tus of the serv o ampl ifier . a) b) d) c) 1) Rea d of f unction ass ignment ( a) ) Click the "R ead " butto n rea ds and dis pla ys al l fun[...]

  • Pagina 286

    7 - 11 7. MR Config urator (b) DIDO func tion d ispla y windo w scre en This scree n is us ed to selec t th e dev ice ass igned to t he pi ns. The f unctio ns dis pla yed b elow * and * are assign able . a) b) Move t he p ointer to th e pl ace of the f unct ion to be as sign ed. Dr ag a nd dro p it as -i s to th e pin you want to assig n in the D I[...]

  • Pagina 287

    7 - 12 7. MR Config urator (c) F unctio n dev ice ass ignm ent ch eck ing auto O N se ttin g disp lay Click the "Ass ignm ent chec k / auto O N setti ng" butt on in the D IDO func tion dis pla y win dow disp la y s th e fol lowi ng wi ndow . d) c) e) b) a) The as signed func tions are i ndicat ed b y. The f unctions assign ed b y auto ON [...]

  • Pagina 288

    7 - 13 7. MR Config urator 7.7 Tes t operatio n CAUTION W hen conf irm ing the m achine opera tion in the tes t oper ation m od e, use the mac hine af ter chec kin g th at the s afet y m echanis m s uch as the for ced s top ( EMG) operat es. If an y operat ional fau lt has occur red, s top op erati on us ing t he for ced s top ( EMG). 7.7.1 Jog o p[...]

  • Pagina 289

    7 - 14 7. MR Config urator a) b) g) c) d) e) h) f) (1) Ser vo m otor sp eed se tti ng ( a) ) Enter a ne w valu e into the " Motor s peed" in put fi eld and press the ent er ke y. (2) Acc eler ation /dece lerat ion t ime c onstan t sett ing ( b) ) Enter a ne w valu e into the " Acce l/dece l tim e" input fi eld and pres s the e n[...]

  • Pagina 290

    7 - 15 7. MR Config urator 7.7.2 Pos itioning operati on POINT The s ervo motor will not oper ate if the for ced stop (EMG), f orward rotat ion strok e end (LSP) a nd rever se rota tion str oke end (LSN) are of f. Mak e automatic ON setting to t urn on these d evices or m ake device settin g to assign them as external in put signa ls and turn o n a[...]

  • Pagina 291

    7 - 16 7. MR Config urator d) e) f) g) h) l) m) a) b) i) j) k) c) (1) Ser vo m otor sp eed se tti ng ( a) ) Enter a ne w valu e into the " Motor s peed" in put fi eld and press the ent er ke y. (2) Acc eler ation /dece lerat ion t ime c onstan t sett ing ( b) ) Enter a ne w valu e into the " Acce l/dece l tim e" input fi eld and[...]

  • Pagina 292

    7 - 17 7. MR Config urator (10 ) Pulse mov e distan ce unit sel ection (k) Selec t wit h the o ption butto ns whet her the m ov ing dis tanc e set is in t he co mm and inpu t puls e unit or in th e encoder puls e un it. (11) Ser vo m otor s oft ware f orced s top ( 1)) Click the "S oftware f orce d stop " but ton to st op th e ser vo moto[...]

  • Pagina 293

    7 - 18 7. MR Config urator 7.7.3 Motor -less op eration POINT W hen this operation is us ed in an absol ute positi on detectio n system , the home pos ition can not be re stored pro perl y. W ithout a ser vo m otor being c onn ected, the ou tput s igna ls are prov ided and th e ser vo am plif ier dis pla y sho ws the st atus as if a servo motor is [...]

  • Pagina 294

    7 - 19 7. MR Config urator 7.7.4 Outp ut signal (D O) for ced output POINT W hen an alarm occurs , the DO forc ed output is a utom atically canc eled. Each s ervo amplif ier ou tput signa l is forc ibl y switc hed o n/off in depe nden tly of t he output c ond ition of the output signal . Click "T est" on the m enu b ar an d clic k "F[...]

  • Pagina 295

    7 - 20 7. MR Config urator (1) Si gnal ON /OFF s etting ( a) , b) ) Choose t he s ignal name or pin num ber an d clic k the "O N" or "OFF " but ton to wr ite the c orr espon ding s igna l status to t he ser vo am plifi er. (2) DO forced output window closing ( c) ) Click the "C lose " but ton to c ance l the DO f orced[...]

  • Pagina 296

    7 - 21 7. MR Config urator Click the "O K" b utto n to dis pla y th e sett ing sc reen of th e Sing le-ste p fee d. During the ser vo on, the conf irm ation wi ndow ind icati ng that th e next opera tio n is in the sto p status is displ ayed. After c onfir ming that the op erati on is in t he sto p stat us, c lick the "OK" b utt[...]

  • Pagina 297

    7 - 22 7. MR Config urator (7) Servo motor software forced stop ( f) ) Click the "S oftware f orce d stop " but ton to st op th e ser vo motor r otati on im media tel y. W hen the "S oft ware forc ed stop " bu tton is e nabled, the "Start " bu tton c ann ot be us ed. Clic k the "Soft ware forc ed sto p" but t[...]

  • Pagina 298

    7 - 23 7. MR Config urator 7.8 Alarm 7.8.1 Alar m dis pla y POINT If a m enu is clic ked or any other o peratio n is p erform ed during alarm occurr ence, the f ollowing m essage windo w appears . The exam ple gi ven here is the win dow that indica tes an oc currenc e of Encoder error 1 (A16). The curr ent alarm can be di spla yed. To dis pla y the[...]

  • Pagina 299

    7 - 24 7. MR Config urator (1) Current alarm display The window s ho ws the a larm num ber, nam e, caus e and oc cur rence t im e. The f ollowi ng exam pl e is t he window t hat indic ates an oc curr ence of Enc oder error 1 (A1 6). (2) Alarm reset ( a) ) Click the "Res et alar m" butt on to res et the curr ent al arm and clear a larm s o[...]

  • Pagina 300

    7 - 25 7. MR Config urator Click the "R ead " button to r ead t he mon itor d ata a t erro r occ urrenc e from the s ervo am plifier. Read r esu lts are displ ayed as fol lows.[...]

  • Pagina 301

    7 - 26 7. MR Config urator 7.8.3 Alarm his tory Click "Alar m" o n th e m enu bar and click "H istor y" on the m enu. W hen the ab ove c hoices are m ade, the fo llow ing wi ndow a ppears . b) a) (1) A larm histor y d ispla y The m ost r ecent s ix alar ms are dis pla yed. T he sm aller num bers ind icate new er alar ms. (2) Ala[...]

  • Pagina 302

    8 - 1 8. PARAMETER UNIT ( MR-PRU03 ) 8. PARAMET ER UNIT (MR- PRU03) POINT Do not use MR-PRU03 param eter unit a nd MR C onfigur ator toget her. Perfor m s imple d ata se ttin g, tes t oper atio n, par ameter sett ing, etc. wi thout MR Co nfigur ator b y con necti ng the MR-PRU 03 p aram eter un it to t he s ervo am plif ier.[...]

  • Pagina 303

    8 - 2 8. PARAMETER UNI T (MR-PRU 03) 8.1 Exter nal appe arance a nd k ey explanati ons This sect ion gi ves t he ext ernal appe aranc e and expla nat ions of the ke ys. PRU03 MON DAT A PARAM ALM/ DGN TEST Fn SHIFT ESC 7 89 DE F 4 5 6 A BC 123 0 1STEP STO P RESET REV FWD Key MON DATA PARAM ALM / DGN TEST Mode k ey Fn SHIFT ESC 0 9 F STOP RESE T REV [...]

  • Pagina 304

    8 - 3 8. PARAMETER UNI T (MR-PRU 03) 8.2 Specific atio ns Item De scriptio n Model MR-PRU03 Power supply Supplied from the servo amplifier Parameter m ode Basic setti ng parameters, Gain/filter param eters, Extension settin g paramet ers, I/O setting parameters Monitor m ode (Status display) Current position, Command position, Command remaining dis[...]

  • Pagina 305

    8 - 4 8. PARAMETER UNI T (MR-PRU 03) 8.4 Conn ection with ser vo am plifier 8.4.1 Sing le axis (1) C onfigur atio n di agram Opera te the s ing le-ax is ser vo am plif ier. I t is r ecom m ended to us e t he fol lowing c ab le. Servo amplifier CN3 Pa ra met e r uni t (MR-PRU03) 10BASE-T cable, etc. (EIA568-compliant cable) (2) Cable internal wiring[...]

  • Pagina 306

    8 - 5 8. PARAMETER UNI T (MR-PRU 03) 8.4.2 Multi drop co nnectio n (1) C onfigur atio n di agram Up to 32 ax es of ser vo am plif iers f rom stat ions 0 to 31 c an be oper ated on t he sam e bus . (N ote 2) (Note 2) (Note 2) Servo amplifier CN3 Servo amplifier CN3 Servo amplifier CN3 (Note 3) (Not e 1) Parameter unit (MR-PRU03) (Note 1) (Note 1) (N[...]

  • Pagina 307

    8 - 6 8. PARAMETER UNI T (MR-PRU 03) (2) Cable internal wiring diagram W ire the ca bles as sho wn belo w. Pa ram et e r unit 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 12345678 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 (Note 4, 5) LG P5D RDP SDN SDP RDN LG NC (Note 5) (Note 1) Axis 1 servo amplifier CN3 connector (R J45 c onn ect or) 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 12345678 7 1 2 3 4[...]

  • Pagina 308

    8 - 7 8. PARAMETER UNI T (MR-PRU 03) 8.5 Displ ay Connec t the MR-PR U03 param eter u nit to t he ser vo a m plifier, and tur n ON the power of the s ervo ampl ifier. In this s ection , the sc reen tra nsiti on of the MR- PRU 03 par ameter unit is ex plai ned, together with th e opera tio n proce dure in eac h mode . 8.5.1 Outl ine of s creen tran [...]

  • Pagina 309

    8 - 8 8. PARAMETER UNI T (MR-PRU 03) 8.5.2 MR-P RU03 param eter unit s etting Set and enter the st ation number. (e.g. To enter 31th axis) Station number Cont ra st adj us tme nt Buzzer Baud rate selection 3 1 ESC MR-PRU03 paramet er unit setting Press the " " keys to sele ct, and press the " " key t o set. Press t he " &qu[...]

  • Pagina 310

    8 - 9 8. PARAMETER UNI T (MR-PRU 03) 8.5.3 Monit or m ode (status displa y) (1) Monitor display The s ervo s tatus dur ing op erati on is show n on t he d ispl ay. Ref er t o (2) i n this sect ion f or d etails . 1. Current position 2. Command position 3. Command remaining d istance 4. Point table No . 5. Cu mulati ve feedb ack p ulses 6. Servo mot[...]

  • Pagina 311

    8 - 10 8. PARAMETER UNI T (MR-PRU 03) (2) M onitor display list The f ollowi ng ta ble l ists t he item s and descr ipti ons of m onitor disp lay. St at us dis pl ay Display on paramet er unit Unit Desc ription Di splay range Current position Cur posi t 10 STM mm The current position from the machine home posit ion of 0 is displayed. 9999999 to 999[...]

  • Pagina 312

    8 - 11 8. PARAMETER UNI T (MR-PRU 03) 8.5.4 Alar m/diagn ostic m ode (1) Alarm display The f lowchar t belo w sho ws the pr ocedur e of s ettings invo lving a larm s, alar m his tory, ext ern al I/O s ignal (DIDO) dis pla y, devic e and diag nosis . ALM/ DGN Alarm Current alarm (When undervoltage (A10) occurred.) Alarm history Motor in formation To[...]

  • Pagina 313

    8 - 12 8. PARAMETER UNI T (MR-PRU 03) (2) Al arm histor y cle ar The s ervo am plif ier st ores o ne curr ent a larm and fi ve pas t alarm s f rom when its p ower is switc he d on fir st. To c ontrol a larm s whic h wil l occ ur dur ing oper atio n, c lear the al arm histor y befor e st arting oper ation. ALM/ DGN STOP RESET 1) Select " ALM Hi[...]

  • Pagina 314

    8 - 13 8. PARAMETER UNI T (MR-PRU 03) 8.5.5 Par ameter mode The f lowchart bel ow sho ws the proc edure for s ettin g par am eters. DATA PARAM Select a parameter gr oup. First parameter number is displayed. e.g. To selec t the gain/filter parameter, press: Write Write is com pleted. The f oll owi ng messa ge appears if switching power off or on is [...]

  • Pagina 315

    8 - 14 8. PARAMETER UNI T (MR-PRU 03) 8.5.6 Point table m ode The f lowchart bel ow sho ws the proc edure for s ettin g po int ta ble dat a. DATA PARAM e.g. To set s etting value "4567.89", press: SHIFT Servo mot or speed di splay Acceleration tim e cons tant dis play Deceler ation ti me cons tant dis play Dwell display Auxiliary function[...]

  • Pagina 316

    8 - 15 8. PARAMETER UNI T (MR-PRU 03) 8.5.7 T est operat ion mode CAUTION W hen conf irm ing the m achine opera tion in the tes t oper ation m od e, use the mac hine af ter chec kin g th at the s afet y m echanis m s uch as the for ced s top ( EMG) operat es. If an y operat ional fau lt has occur red, s top op erati on us ing t he for ced s top ( E[...]

  • Pagina 317

    8 - 16 8. PARAMETER UNI T (MR-PRU 03) (1) Jo g oper atio n Jog op erati on can be perfor m ed when th ere is no c omm and fr om the ex tern al com m and devic e. Connec t EMG-DO COM to s tart j og oper ation . (a) Op erati on/canc el You ca n chan ge th e oper ati on con ditions with t he p aram eter un it. T he in itial c o nditio ns a nd sett ing[...]

  • Pagina 318

    8 - 17 8. PARAMETER UNI T (MR-PRU 03) (2) Pos ition ing o perat ion Posit ionin g oper atio n can be perf orm ed once when there is no c omm and f rom the ext ernal c omm and device. Connec t EMG-DO COM to s tart pos ition ing oper ation. (a) Op erati on/canc el You ca n chan ge th e oper ati on con ditions with t he p aram eter un it. T he in itia[...]

  • Pagina 319

    8 - 18 8. PARAMETER UNI T (MR-PRU 03) If the com m unicatio n cable is disc onnect ed dur ing pos iti oning op erat ion, th e servo m otor wil l com e to a sudden stop. (b) Status di splay You can m oni tor the st atus displa y even durin g posit io ning oper atio n. At t his tim e, the "FW D", "REV " and "ST OP " ke y[...]

  • Pagina 320

    8 - 19 8. PARAMETER UNI T (MR-PRU 03) (5) Single -step feed Operation is perf orm ed in acc ordance with t he pres et point table No. Connec t EMG-DO COM to s tart s ingle-st ep f eed. The fo llowin g shows th e operation conditio n settings and th e ope ration proced ures. ESC Test o pera tion mo de canc el Retur ns to t he initi al scre en of th [...]

  • Pagina 321

    8 - 20 8. PARAMETER UNI T (MR-PRU 03) (2) Messa ges Message Desc ription Valid parameters were w ritten when power is of f. The MR-PRU03 paramet er unit was used to set a station number and perform trans ition during the test operation m ode. Operation m ode is the t est operation mode. The test m ode was changed due to external fac tor. Reading se[...]

  • Pagina 322

    9 - 1 9 GENERAL GAIN ADJUSTMENT 9. GENERAL GAIN A DJUSTMENT 9.1 Diff erent adjus tment metho ds 9.1.1 Adjus tm ent on a sin gle servo amplif ier The g ain adj ustm ent i n this sec tion c an be m ade on a sin gle s ervo am plif ier. F or ga in a djustm ent, first execu te auto tu ning m ode 1. If you are not s atisf ied with t he res ults, ex ecute[...]

  • Pagina 323

    9 - 2 9. GENERAL GAIN ADJUSTMENT (2) Adj ustm ent seq uence an d mode usage Usage Used when you want to match the position gai n (PG1) between 2 or more axes. Normall y not used for other purposes. Allows adjustm ent by merely changing the respons e level setting. First us e this mode to mak e adjustm ent. Used when the conditions of auto tuning mo[...]

  • Pagina 324

    9 - 3 9. GENERAL GAIN ADJUSTMENT 9.2 Auto tuning 9.2.1 Auto t uning m ode The s ervo ampl ifier h as a rea l-tim e auto tu ning f unction which es tim ates th e mach ine char acter istic ( load inert ia m oment r atio) in re al tim e and a utom atica lly sets the op timum gains ac cor ding to that va lue. T his functi on pe rm its ease of ga in adj[...]

  • Pagina 325

    9 - 4 9. GENERAL GAIN ADJUSTMENT 9.2.2 Auto t uning m ode op eration The b lock di agram of real-ti m e auto tun ing is sho wn be low. Servo motor Command Automa tic sett ing Loop gains PG1,VG1 PG2,VG2,VIC Current control Current feedback Load inertia momen t Encoder Position/speed feedback Real-time auto tuning section Speed feedback Load inertia [...]

  • Pagina 326

    9 - 5 9. GENERAL GAIN ADJUSTMENT 9.2.3 Adjus tment pr ocedure b y auto t uning Since auto tun ing is m ade v alid bef ore sh ipm ent from the factor y, sim pl y run ning th e serv o motor autom atica ll y sets th e opt imum gains tha t m atch the m achin e. Mer el y changing the r espons e le vel se tting v alu e as requ ired com pletes the adj ust[...]

  • Pagina 327

    9 - 6 9. GENERAL GAIN ADJUSTMENT 9.2.4 Respo nse lev el settin g in aut o tuning m ode Set t he resp ons e (The f irs t d igit of param eter No.PA0 9) of the whole ser vo s ystem . As the r esp onse leve l settin g is i ncre ased, t he tra ck abilit y and se ttli ng tim e for a c omm and d ecreas es, but a to o high r esp onse l evel will g enera t[...]

  • Pagina 328

    9 - 7 9. GENERAL GAIN ADJUSTMENT 9.3 Manual m ode 1 (sim ple m anual adjustm ent) If you are not s atisf ied wi th the adj ustm ent of auto t unin g, you ca n m ake s imple m anual adj ustm ent with thr ee param eters. POINT If m achine res onanc e occ urs , filter t uni ng mode ( par ameter No. PB01) or mac hine res ona nce sup pre ssion f ilter ([...]

  • Pagina 329

    9 - 8 9. GENERAL GAIN ADJUSTMENT (c) Adju stm ent description 1) Spee d loop ga in (param eter No. PB0 9) This param eter determ ines the r esp onse leve l of t he s peed c ontro l loo p. Inc re asing this value enha nces res pons e bu t a too h igh value will m ake the m ec hanic al s ystem liab le to v ibrat e. The actual resp onse f reque nc y o[...]

  • Pagina 330

    9 - 9 9. GENERAL GAIN ADJUSTMENT (2) For position control (a) Parameters The f ollowi ng par ameter s are us ed f or gai n adjus tm ent. Parameter No. Abbreviation Name PB06 GD2 Ratio of load i nertia moment to servo motor i nertia moment PB07 PG1 Model loop gain PB08 PG2 Positi on loop gain PB09 VG2 Speed loop gain PB10 VI C S peed integral compen[...]

  • Pagina 331

    9 - 10 9. GENERAL GAIN ADJUSTMENT (c) Adju stm ent description 1) Spee d loop ga in (VG2: param eter No. PB0 9) This param eter deter mines th e resp onse leve l of the s peed c ontr ol loop. I ncr easin g this va lue enhanc es res pons e but a to o hig h valu e will m ak e the m echanic al s ystem li able to vibrat e. T he actua l respo nse frequ [...]

  • Pagina 332

    9 - 11 9. GENERAL GAIN ADJUSTMENT 9.4 Interpo latio n mode The inter polat ion m ode is us ed to match th e pos ition lo op gains of the axes wh en perf orm ing the int erpo lation operat ion of servo m otors of two or m ore axes f or an X-Y tabl e or the l ike. In th is mod e, manua ll y set the mode l loop g ain t hat det erm ines c omm and track[...]

  • Pagina 333

    9 - 12 9. GENERAL GAIN ADJUSTMENT 9.5 Dif ferenc es between M ELSER VO-J2- Super an d MEL SERVO- J3 in au to tunin g To m eet h igher r espons e d em ands, th e MEL SER VO-J3 s eries has been chang ed in res pons e le vel se ttin g range f rom the M R-J2- Supe r. T he fo llowin g tab le lis ts c om parison of th e res ponse le vel s etting. MELSERV[...]

  • Pagina 334

    10 - 1 10. SPECIAL AD JUSTMENT FUNCTIONS 10. SPE CIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS POINT The f unctions gi ven in th is c hapter need not be us ed gener all y. Use them if you are n ot satisf ied with t he m achine status after m aking a djustm ent in the methods in chapter 9. If a m echanic al s ystem has a natur al r esonanc e poi nt, inc reas ing the s [...]

  • Pagina 335

    10 - 2 10. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS (2) Parameters The op erati on of a dapt ive tu ning m ode (p aram eter No .PB0 1). Filter tunin g mode s election 000 Pa ra met er N o. PB 01 Setting Filter adjustment mode Aut omatically set parameter 0 Filter OFF (Note) 1 Filt er tuning mode Para meter N o.P B13 Para m eter N o.P B14 2 Manual mode Note. Pa[...]

  • Pagina 336

    10 - 3 10. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS (3) Ada pti ve tun ing m ode pr oced ure The response has increased to the machin e limit . The machine is too complicated to provide the optimum filter. Facto r Adaptive tuning adjustment Operation Is the target response reached? Tuning ends automatically after t he predetermined period of time. (Parameter N[...]

  • Pagina 337

    10 - 4 10. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS POINT "Filter O FF" ena bles a re turn to t he factor y-set in itial value. W hen adaptive tuni ng is ex ecuted, vibrat ion soun d increas es as an excitatio n signal is forc ibl y applied f or sever al sec onds . W hen adaptive tuni ng is ex ecuted, m achine resona nce is d etected f or a maxim um [...]

  • Pagina 338

    10 - 5 10. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS (2) Parameters (a) M achin e res onanc e sup pressi on f ilter 1 ( par ameter No. PB13, PB14) Set the n otc h frequ enc y, notch depth a nd notc h wid th of the mac hine r esona nce s uppress ion fi lter 1 (param eter No .PB13 , PB 14) W hen you have made ada ptive fil ter t uning m ode (p aram eter N o.P B01[...]

  • Pagina 339

    10 - 6 10. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS 10.4 Adva nced vibrati on suppress ion contro l (1) Op erati on Vibra tion s uppres sio n contr ol is used to fur ther s uppr ess machin e sid e vibr ation, suc h as wor kpi ece end vibrat ion an d base s hak e. The m otor s ide op erati on is a djuste d for pos it ionin g so th at the m achi ne does not shak[...]

  • Pagina 340

    10 - 7 10. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS (3) Vi brati on sup pressi on co ntrol tuning m ode proc edur e No Estimation cannot be made as machine side vibration has not been tran smitte d to th e motor s ide. The response of the model loop gain has increased to the ma chine side vibration frequency (vibration suppression control limi t). Vibration su[...]

  • Pagina 341

    10 - 8 10. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS (4) Vi brati on sup pressi on co ntrol m anu al m ode Measur e work side vibrat ion and devic e shake wit h the m achine an al yzer or ext ernal measur ing instr um ent, and se t the vibrat ion s uppr ess ion co ntrol vibrat ion f requ enc y (param eter No.PB 19) an d vibr ation suppr ession c on trol res on [...]

  • Pagina 342

    10 - 9 10. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS POINT W hen machine sid e vibr ation does not sho w up in m otor s ide vibrat ion, the setting of the m otor side v ibration f requenc y does not produce a n eff ect. W hen the anti-reson ance f requenc y and reso nance f requenc y can be confirm ed using the mac hine an alyzer or ex ternal F FT dev ice, do n[...]

  • Pagina 343

    10 - 10 10. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS 10.5 Low-pas s filter (1) Function W hen a ba ll scr ew or the like is us ed, r esona nce of hi gh f reque ncy m ay occ ur as the resp onse lev el of the servo s ystem is inc reas ed. T o pr even t th is, t he l ow-pas s fi lter is f actor y-se t to b e v alid f or a torq ue comm and. T he filt er f reque nc[...]

  • Pagina 344

    10 - 11 10. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS 10.6.2 Func tion bl ock diagr am The v alid loop ga ins PG2, V G2, VI C and GD2 of the actua l lo op are chan ged acc or ding to the c ondi tions selec ted b y gain c hang ing s elect ion C DP (p aram eter No. PB26) and gain c hangi ng c ondit ion CD S (par ameter No.PB27). PG2B Para meter N o.PB30 GD2 Para [...]

  • Pagina 345

    10 - 12 10. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS 10.6.3 Par ameter s W hen using the gain chan ging f unct ion, alwa ys set " 3 " in pa ramet er No.PA 08 (aut o tuni ng) to cho ose the manual m ode of the gain a djustm ent m odes. T he gain changi ng fu nctio n canno t be us ed in the aut o tun ing mode. Parameter No. Abbreviati on Name Unit Desc[...]

  • Pagina 346

    10 - 13 10. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS (1) Pa rameters No.PB06 t o PB10 Thes e param eters are th e sam e as i n ord inar y manu al adj ustm ent. Ga in ch angin g allo ws the va lues of ratio of load inert ia m om ent to ser vo m otor in ertia m om ent, pos ition loop g ain, spe ed loop gai n and s peed integr al com pens atio n to be cha nged . [...]

  • Pagina 347

    10 - 14 10. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS 10.6.4 Ga in chang ing oper ation This op erat ion will be descr ibed b y wa y of set ting ex am ples. (1) W hen you choos e chang ing by input device (a) Setting Para m eter No. Abbrevi ation Nam e Setting Unit PB07 P G1 Model loop gain 100 rad/s PB06 GD2 Ratio of l oad inertia moment to servo motor inertia[...]

  • Pagina 348

    10 - 15 10. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS (2) W hen you choos e chang ing by droo p pulses (a) Setting Para m eter No. Abbrevi ation Nam e Setting Unit PB 07 P G1 Model l oop gain 100 rad/s PB06 GD2 Ratio of l oad inerti a mom ent to servo m otor inertia m oment 4.0 Multiplier ( 1) PB 08 P G2 P ositi on loop gain 120 rad/s PB 09 V G2 S peed loop gai[...]

  • Pagina 349

    10 - 16 10. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS MEMO[...]

  • Pagina 350

    11 - 1 11. TROUBLESHOOTING 11. TROUBLESHOOTING 11.1 Troub le at s tart-up CAUTION Exc essiv e adjus tment or c hange of p aram eter s etting m ust not b e m ade as it wil l mak e operat ion instab le. POINT Using t he M R Conf igurator , you can r efer t o unro tated s ervo m otor r easons , etc. The f ollowi ng fau lts m ay occur a t st art-up. If[...]

  • Pagina 351

    11 - 2 11. TROUBLESHOOTI NG 11.2 Oper ation at error oc currenc e An err or occ urr ing dur in g oper ation will r esul t in an y of the s tatus es i ndicat ed in the foll owing t abl e. Operation m ode Error location Des cription Test operat ion CC-Li nk operation Servo operation Stop Stop Servo side alarm occurrenc e CC-Link dat a communication C[...]

  • Pagina 352

    11 - 3 11. TROUBLESHOOTI NG 11.4 W hen alarm or warnin g has occ urred POINT Configur e up a c ircu it whic h will detect the tr oubl e (ALM ) signa l and tur n off the servo- on (RYn 0) at occur renc e of an alarm . 11.4.1 Alar ms and warning list W hen a fault occ urs dur ing operat ion, t he corr espon ding al arm or warni ng is disp la yed. If [...]

  • Pagina 353

    11 - 4 11. TROUBLESHOOTI NG 11.4.2 Rem edies f or alarm s CAUTION W hen an y alarm has occ urred, el iminat e its c ause , ens ure s afet y, then r ese t the alarm , and r estar t oper ation . Oth erwis e, inj ur y may occ ur. If an absolut e pos itio n eras e (A 25) oc curre d, a lways m ak e hom e posit ion s ettin g again. Not d oing so m ay cau[...]

  • Pagina 354

    11 - 5 11. TROUBLESHOOTI NG Display Nam e Def initi on Caus e Action 1. Faulty parts in the servo amplifier Checking method Alarm (A15) occurs if power i s switched on after disc onnection of all cables but the c ontrol circuit power supply cables. A15 Memory error 2 (EEP-ROM) EEP-ROM fault 2. The number of write times to EEP- ROM exceeded 100,000.[...]

  • Pagina 355

    11 - 6 11. TROUBLESHOOTI NG Display Nam e Def initi on Cause A ction 1. Wrong setting of parameter No. PA02 Set c orrectly. 2. Built-i n regenerative resistor or regenerative option is not connect ed. Connect c orrectly 3. High-duty operat ion or continuous regenerative operation c aused the permissib le regenerative power of the regenerative opt i[...]

  • Pagina 356

    11 - 7 11. TROUBLESHOOTI NG Displa y Name Definition Caus e A ction 1. Short occurred in servo m otor pow er (U, V , W). Correct t he w iring. A32 Overcurrent 2. Transistor (IPM, IGBT) of t he servo amplifi er faulty. Checking method Alarm (A32) occurs if p ower is switched on after U,V and W ar e disconnected. Change the servo amplifier. 3. Ground[...]

  • Pagina 357

    11 - 8 11. TROUBLESHOOTI NG Displa y Name Definition Caus e A ction A37 Paramete r error P arameter s etting is wrong. 1. Servo amplifier f ault caused the paramet er setting to be rew ritten. Change the servo amplifier. 2. Regenerative opti on not used with servo amplifi er was selected in paramet er No.PA02. Se t p ar am ete r No .P A0 2 co rre c[...]

  • Pagina 358

    11 - 9 11. TROUBLESHOOTI NG Display Nam e Definiti on Cause Action A50 Overload 1 Load exceeded overload protect ion charact eristic of servo amplifi er. 1. Servo amplifier is used i n ex cess of its conti nuous output current. 1. Reduce load. 2. Check operation pattern. 3. Use servo motor that provides larger output. 2. Servo syst em is instable a[...]

  • Pagina 359

    11 - 10 11. TROUBLESHOOTI NG Display Nam e Definition Cause A ction A52 Error excessi ve 1. Acceleration/decelerat ion time constant is too small. Increas e the acceleration/deceleration tim e constant . 2. Forward rotation torque limit (paramet er No.PA11) or reverse rotation torque limit (param eter No.PA12) are too sm all. Increas e the torque l[...]

  • Pagina 360

    11 - 11 11. TROUBLESHOOTI NG Display Nam e Def inition Cause Action (Note) 888 Watchdog CPU, parts faulty. Fault of parts in s ervo ampl ifier. Checking method Alarm (888) occurs if power is switched on after d isconnection of all cables but the control circuit power su pply cable. Change the servo amplifier. Note. At power-on, "888" appe[...]

  • Pagina 361

    11 - 12 11. TROUBLESHOOTI NG Display Nam e Definit ion Caus e Acti on 1. Battery cable is open. Repair cable or changed. A92 Open battery cable warning Absolu te po sition detection s ystem battery voltage is low. 2. Battery vol tage supplied from the servo amplifi er to the encoder fell to abo ut 3V or less. (Detect ed with the encoder) Change the[...]

  • Pagina 362

    11 - 13 11. TROUBLESHOOTI NG Display Nam e Definit ion Caus e Acti on Cooling fan life expirati on (Refer to section 2.5.) Change the cooling fan of the servo amplifi er. AE8 Cooling fan speed reduction warning The speed of the servo amplifi er decreased to or below the warning level. This warning is not displayed with MR-J3- 70T/100T among servo a[...]

  • Pagina 363

    11 - 14 11. TROUBLESHOOTI NG MEMO[...]

  • Pagina 364

    12 - 1 12. OUTLINE DRAWINGS 12. OUTLINE DRA W INGS 12.1 Servo am plif ier (1) MR-J3-10T MR-J 3-20T MR-J3- 10T1 MR-J 3-20T 1 [Unit: mm] Approx. 80 Approx. 68 Approx. 25.5 6 CNP3 4 40 (Note) CNP2 CNP1 6 135 With MR-J3BAT 6 mounting hole Rating plate CN1 Note. This data applies to the 3-phase or 1-phase 200 to 230VAC power supply models. For a single-[...]

  • Pagina 365

    12 - 2 12. OUTLINE DRAW INGS (2) MR-J3-40T MR-J 3-60T MR-J3- 40T1 [Unit: mm] 40 CNP1 Approx. 68 6 Approx. 25.5 (Note) CNP2 5 6 Approx. 80 170 CNP3 CN1 Rating plate 6 mounting hole With MR-J3BAT Note. This data applies to the 3-phase or 1-phase 200 to 230VAC power supply models. For a single-phase, 100 to 120VAC power supply, refer to the terminal s[...]

  • Pagina 366

    12 - 3 12. OUTLINE DRAW INGS (3) MR-J3-70T MR-J 3-10 0T [Unit: mm] Approx. 68 Approx. 25.5 6 42 12 CNP3 6 60 CNP2 CNP1 12 Approx. 80 Cooling fan wind direction 185 CN1 6 mounting hole With MR-J3BAT Rating plate Mass: 1.4 [kg] (3.09 [lb]) U V W CNP3 P C D L 11 L 21 CNP2 L 1 L 2 L 3 N P 1 P 2 CNP1 Terminal signal layout PE termin al Screw size: M4 Ti[...]

  • Pagina 367

    12 - 4 12. OUTLINE DRAW INGS (4) MR-J3-60T4 MR-J3- 100T4 [Unit: mm] 60 42 Approx. 25.5 Approx. 68 6 12 12 Approx. 80 195 CNP1 CNP2 CNP3 CN1 6 With MR-J3BAT Rating plate 6 mounting hole Mass: 1.4 [kg] (3.09 [lb]) U V W CNP3 P C D L 11 L 21 CNP2 L 1 L 2 L 3 N P 1 P 2 CNP1 Screw size: M4 Tightening torque: 1.2 [N m] (10 .6 [lb in]) Terminal signal lay[...]

  • Pagina 368

    12 - 5 12. OUTLINE DRAW INGS (5) MR-J3-200T(4) POINT Connectors (CNP1, CN P2, and C NP3) and appeara nce of MR-J 3-200T s ervo amplif ier have b een c hanged f rom January 200 8 prod uction. Mo del n am e of the exis ting ser vo am plifier is chang ed to M R-J3-200T -RT . For MR- J3-200T - RT, ref er to appendix 5. [Unit: mm] CNP2 CNP3 CNP1 CN1 195[...]

  • Pagina 369

    12 - 6 12. OUTLINE DRAW INGS (6) MR-J3-350T [Unit: mm] 85 6 78 Approx. 25.5 90 Approx. 68 6 6 45 Approx. 80 195 21.4 6 CNP1 CNP3 CNP2 CN1 6 mounting hole With MR-J3BAT Rating plate Cooling fan wind direction Mass: 2.3 [kg] (5.07 [lb]) U V W CNP3 P C D L 11 L 21 CNP2 L 1 L 2 L 3 N P 1 P 2 CNP1 Terminal signal layout PE ter minal Screw size: M4 Tight[...]

  • Pagina 370

    12 - 7 12. OUTLINE DRAW INGS (7) MR-J3-350T4 MR-J3- 500T (4) [Unit: mm] 3 p lac es fo r ground (M4 ) With MR-J3BAT Terminal layout (Terminal cover open) 2- 6 mo unting hole Built-in r egenerative resistor lead terminal fixing screw 130 118 6 Ap pro x. 7. 5 Approx. 7.5 250 235 6 200 Approx. 80 131.5 68.5 Cooling f an wind dir ection 6 TE1 TE2 TE3 20[...]

  • Pagina 371

    12 - 8 12. OUTLINE DRAW INGS (8) MR-J3-700T(4) [Unit: mm] 149.2 102.6 99.8 75 200 Cooling fan wind direction 6 160 172 6 Approx. 80 6 13 13 31 10 14.5 7 13 91 13 24.5 13 13 34 CN1 TE2 TE1 TE3 2- 6 mounting hole With MR-J3BAT Rating plate Built-in regenerative resistor lead terminal fixing screw Mass: 6.2 [kg] (13.7[lb]) VW TE2 N L 11 L 21 TE3 L 1 L[...]

  • Pagina 372

    12 - 9 12. OUTLINE DRAW INGS (9) MR-J3-11KT(4) to 22KT(4) [Unit: mm] 12 236 12 260 12 260 Approx. 80 Cooling fan wind direction With MR-J3BAT TE 26 6 26 156 13 123 183 227 52 CN1 2-12 mounting hole Rating plate Servo amplifi er Mas s[kg]([lb] ) MR-J3-11KT(4) 18.0(39.7) MR-J3-15KT(4) 18.0(39.7) MR-J3-22KT(4) 19.0(41.9) 236 0.5 Approx. 260 4-M10 scre[...]

  • Pagina 373

    12 - 10 12. OUTLINE DRAW INGS 12.2 Connector (1) Min iatur e delt a rib bon ( MDR) s ystem (3M) (a) One-touch lock ty pe [Unit: mm] E B A 23. 8 39.0 12.7 C Logo etc, are indicated here. D Each type of dimension Connector S hell kit A B C D E 10150-3000PE 10350-52F0-008 41.1 52.4 18. 0 14.0 17.0 (b) Jack screw M2 .6 type This i s not ava ilabl e as [...]

  • Pagina 374

    12 - 11 12. OUTLINE DRAW INGS (2) SCR connector s y stem (3M) Recept acle : 36210- 0100 PL Shell k it : 363 10-32 00-00 8 34.8 39.5 22.4 11.0[...]

  • Pagina 375

    12 - 12 12. OUTLINE DRAW INGS MEMO[...]

  • Pagina 376

    13 - 1 13. CHARACTERISTICS 13. CHARA CTERISTICS 13.1 Overl oad prot ection c haracterist ics An elec tronic therm al re la y is built in the s ervo am plif ier to pr otect t he ser vo m otor an d servo am plif ier f rom overl oads. O ver load 1 alar m (A50) occ urs if over load opera tion perf orm ed is a bove the e lectr onic therm al re la y prot[...]

  • Pagina 377

    13 - 2 13 CHARACT ERIST ICS 10000 100 0 100 10 1 0 10 0 200 300 During operation Durin g s ervo lock O p e r a t i o n t i m e [ s ] (Note) Lo ad ratio [ %] MR-J3-11KT (4) to M R-J3-22KT (4) Note. If operation t hat generates torque more than 100% of the rating is performed with an abnormally high frequency in a servo moto r stop status (servo lock[...]

  • Pagina 378

    13 - 3 13 CHARACT ERIST ICS 13.2 Power suppl y equipm ent capacit y and gener ated los s (1) Am ount of he at gen erat ed b y the s ervo amplif ier Table 13.1 i ndicat es ser vo am plifiers' power s up ply ca pac ities a nd los ses g enera ted under r ated load. F or therm al desi gn of an enc losur e, use th e values in Tab le 13.1 in consid [...]

  • Pagina 379

    13 - 4 13 CHARACT ERIST ICS (Note 2) Servo amplifier-generat ed heat[W] Area required for heat dissi pation Servo ampli fier Servo mot or (Note 1) Power supply capacity [kV A] At rated torque With servo off [m 2 ] HF-SP702 (4) 10.0 300 25 6.0 HA-LP702 10.6 300 25 6. 0 HA-LP601 (4) 10.0 260 25 5.2 MR-J3-700T (4) HA-LP701M (4) 11.0 300 25 6.0 HC-LP11[...]

  • Pagina 380

    13 - 5 13 CHARACT ERIST ICS (2) H eat dis sipa tion ar ea for enc losed ser vo am plifi er The enc lose d contr ol box (her eafte r call ed the c ontr ol box ) whic h will c ont ain the s erv o ampl ifier s hou ld be desig ned t o ensur e that its temper ature rise is with in 10 ( 50 ) at the am bient tem peratur e of 4 0 (104 ). (W ith a 5 (41 ) s[...]

  • Pagina 381

    13 - 6 13 CHARACT ERIST ICS 13.3 D ynamic br ake c haracteristic s 13.3.1 D ynamic brake oper ation (1) C alcul atio n of c oast ing d istanc e Fig. 1 3.3 sh ows th e pat tern in whic h the ser vo m otor co mes to a stop whe n the d ynam ic br ake is oper ated. Use Eq uation 13. 2 to ca lcul ate a n appr oxim ate co astin g dist ance t o a s top. T[...]

  • Pagina 382

    13 - 7 13 CHARACT ERIST ICS Speed [r/min] T i m e c o n s t a n t [ m s ] 500 1000 1500 2000 10 20 30 40 50 60 0 0 81 201 121 51 421 301 Speed [r/min] Time constant [ms] 52 500 1000 150 0 2000 25 00 300 0 152 20 40 60 80 100 120 0 0 102 202 502 702 35 2 HF-SP1 000r/m in s eries HF-SP2000r /min s eri es Speed [r/min] 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 0 500 1[...]

  • Pagina 383

    13 - 8 13 CHARACT ERIST ICS 0 Speed[r /min] 20 40 60 80 100 120 0 500 1000 1500 2000 11K1M 15K1M 22K1M 701M T i m e c o n s t a n t [ m s ] Speed[r/ min] 0 0 500 1000 1500 2000 80 60 40 20 11K2 15K2 22K2 502 702 T i m e c o n s t a n t [ m s ] HA-LP 1500r /min s eries HA-LP 2000r /min s eries T i m e c o n s t a n t [ m s ] 0 0 52 500 100 0 1500 20[...]

  • Pagina 384

    13 - 9 13 CHARACT ERIST ICS 13.3.2 T he d ynamic brak e at the l oad iner tia m oment Use the d ynamic brake und er the lo ad inert ia m oment rati o indica ted in t he follo wing tab le. If the lo ad iner tia mom ent is h igher than th is val ue, th e built- in d ynam ic brak e ma y burn. If t here i s a poss ibi lity th at the l oad inert ia mom [...]

  • Pagina 385

    13 - 10 13 CHARACT ERIST ICS 13.4 Cable flexing lif e The f lexing life of th e cab les is sho wn b elow. This gr aph ca lcula ted values . Si nce t hey are not guara ntee d values , pro vide a l ittle a llo wance f or thes e values . 1 10 7 5 10 7 1 10 8 5 10 6 1 10 6 5 10 5 1 10 5 5 10 4 1 10 4 5 10 3 1 10 3 a b F l e x i n g l i f e [ t i m e s [...]

  • Pagina 386

    14 - 1 14. OPTIONS AND AUXI LIARY EQUIPMENT 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQU IPMENT W ARNING Befor e conn ectin g an y optio n or p eriph eral equipm ent, t urn off the power and wait for 15 m inut es or m ore until the c harge lam p turns of f. T hen, c onfir m that the volt age be tween P( ) and N( ) is s af e with a vo ltag e tester an d other s. [...]

  • Pagina 387

    14 - 2 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT 14.1.1 Com binatio ns of c able/connec tor sets Serv o moto r HF-MP HF-KP 15) 16) 17) 18) 19) 20) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8 ) 13) 14) 9) 10) 11) 12) CN5 CN1 CN6 CN2 CN3 CNP1 CNP2 CNP3 CN4 Direct connection type (cable le ngth 10m or less, IP65) Junction type (ca ble length more than 10m, IP2 0) To 24VDC power sup[...]

  • Pagina 388

    14 - 3 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT Serv o motor HA-LP Servo mot or HC-RP HC-UP HC-LP Servo motor HF-SP Encoder connector Brake connector Power supply connector Encoder connector Brake connector Powe r supply connector Termin al bo x a) b) 24) 25) 26) 27) 28) 29) 30) 26) 34) 30) 35) 36) 26) 24) 25) 24) 25)[...]

  • Pagina 389

    14 - 4 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT No. Product Model Des cription A pplication 1) Servo amplifier power supply connector CNP1 connect or: 54 928-067 0 (Molex) CNP2 connect or: 54 928-052 0 (Molex) CNP3 connect or: 54 928-037 0 (Molex) Supplied with serv o amplifier s of 1kW or less in 100V class and 200V clas s <Applicable c able examp[...]

  • Pagina 390

    14 - 5 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT No. Product Model Des cription A pplication 7) Motor power supply c able MR-PWS2CBL03M-A1-L Cable length: 0.3m Power supply connector HF-MP series HF-KP s eries Refer to sectio n 14.1.3 for details. IP55 Load side lead 8) Motor power supply c able MR-PWS2CBL03M-A2-L Cable length: 0.3m Power supply c onne[...]

  • Pagina 391

    14 - 6 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT No. Product Model Description Applic ation 19) Encoder cable MR-J3JCBL03M-A1-L Cable length: 0.3m En coder connector HF-MP series HF-KP s eries Refer to se ction 14.1 .2 (3 ) for deta ils. IP20 Load side lead 20) Encoder cable MR-J3JCBL03M-A2-L Cable length: 0.3m Enco der connector HF-MP series HF-KP ser[...]

  • Pagina 392

    14 - 7 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT No. Product Model Desc ription A pplication 30) Pow er supply connector set MR-PWCNS3 P lug: CE05-6A32-17SD-D-B SS Cable clamp: CE3057-20A-1-D (D265) (DDK) Example of applicable cable Applic able wire size: 14mm 2 (A WG6) to 22mm 2 (AWG4) Cable finish D: 22 to 23.8mm For HF-SP421 For HF-SP702 For HA-LP70[...]

  • Pagina 393

    14 - 8 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT 14.1.2 Enc oder cabl e/connec tor sets (1) MR-J3ENCBL M- A1-L /H MR-J3E NCBL M- A2-L/ H These ca bles are enc od er cables f or the HF-M P HF-KP s eri es ser vo m otors. T he num erals in th e Ca ble Lengt h fiel d of th e ta ble ar e the s ymbo ls ent ered in the part of t he cab le m odel. T he ca bles[...]

  • Pagina 394

    14 - 9 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT (b) Cable internal wiring diagram Servo amplifier side connector Encoder side connector Plat e MR-J3ENCBL2M-L/-H MR-J3ENCBL5M-L/-H MR- J3E NC BL1 0M-L /- H P5 LG 1 2 MR MRR 3 4 2 3 9 SD 5 4 6 9 LG MR MRR SHD P5 BAT BAT (2) MR-EKCBL M-L/H POINT The f ollowing e ncoder ca bles are of four -wire t ype. When[...]

  • Pagina 395

    14 - 10 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT (a) C onnect ion of ser vo am plifier and ser vo motor Servo mot or HF-MP HF-KP 1) MR-E KCBL M-L MR-E KCBL M-H MR-J3JCBL03M-L Cable length: 0.3m 2) Servo amplifier CN2 Cable model 1) Servo am plifier si de connector 2) Encoder si de connector Receptacle: 36210-0100PL Shell k it: 536310-3200-008 (3M) Con[...]

  • Pagina 396

    14 - 11 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT (b) Int ernal wiring diag ram MR-EKCBL20M-L Servo amplifier side Encoder side P5 LG 1 2 MR MRR 3 4 3 7 9 SD Plate 1 2 8 9 P5G MR MRR SHD P5E BAT BAT (Note ) MR-E KCBL30M- L Servo amplifier side Encoder side P5 LG 1 2 MR MRR 3 4 MDR 8 5 3 7 4 MD 7 9 SD 1 2 8 9 P5G MR MRR MDR MD SHD P5E 6C O N T BAT BA T [...]

  • Pagina 397

    14 - 12 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT (c) W hen fabric ating th e encod er cabl e W hen fabric ating the c able, prep are t he fo llowi ng p arts and too l, a nd fabr icat e it accord ing t o the wiring diagr am in ( b). R efer t o s ectio n 14. 9 for the sp ecific at ions of the us ed cabl e. Parts/Tool Description Connector s et MR-ECNM S[...]

  • Pagina 398

    14 - 13 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT (a) C onnect ion of ser vo am plifier and ser vo motor Servo motor HF-MP HF-KP MR-J3JCBL03M-A2-L MR-E KCBL M-L /-H 1) Servo amplifier 2) Servo motor HF-MP HF-KP MR-J3JCBL03M-A1-L 1) 2) or CN2 Cable model 1) Juncti on connector 2) For encoder connector MR-J3JCBL03M-A1-L MR-J3JCBL03M-A2-L Housing: 1-17216[...]

  • Pagina 399

    14 - 14 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT (4) MR-J3ENSCBL M- L MR-J3E NSCBL M-H These c ables are detect or c ables for HF- SP HA-LP HC-RP HC-U P HC-LP ser ies s ervo m otors. T he numbe r in the cable leng th colu mn of the ta ble in dicat es the sy m bol fil ling the square in the c ab le m odel. Cable lengt hs corr esp ondin g to t he sp eci[...]

  • Pagina 400

    14 - 15 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT (b) Int ernal wiring diag ram P5 LG 1 2 MR MRR 3 4 4 8 9 SD 1 2 5 10 LG MR MRR SHD P5 BAT BAT Servo amplifier side connector Encoder side connector Plate MR-J3ENSCBL10M-L/H MR-J3ENSCBL5M-L/H MR-J3ENSCBL2M-L/H Servo amplifier side con nector Encoder side connector Plate P5 LG 1 2 MR MRR 3 4 4 8 9 SD 1 2 [...]

  • Pagina 401

    14 - 16 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT (5) MR-J3BTCBL03M This ca ble is a batte ry conne ction c able. Use this cable t o retai n the cur rent po sition even if th e dete c tor cable is dis con nect ed fr om the serv o am plifi er. Cable model Cable lengt h A pplication MR-J3BTCBL03M 0.3m Fo r HF- MP HF-KP HF-S P servo m otor (a) C onnect io[...]

  • Pagina 402

    14 - 17 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT 14.1.3 M otor po wer suppl y cables These c ables are motor power sup ply cab les f or th e HF- MP HF-KP se r ies servo mot ors. Th e numera ls in th e Cable Leng th fie ld of the tab le ar e th e s y mbo ls e ntered in th e part of th e cab le m odel. T he ca bles of th e lengths with the s ymbols ar e[...]

  • Pagina 403

    14 - 18 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT 14.1.4 M otor brak e cables Thes e cables are m otor br ak e cables f or the HF-MP HF -KP s eries s ervo m otors . T he num erals in the C able Length f ield of the ta ble ar e the s y m bols e ntered in th e part of th e cabl e model . T he cables of the leng ths with the s ymbols are avail able. Refe [...]

  • Pagina 404

    14 - 19 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT 14.2 Regenerat ive options CAUTION The s pecif ied com bi nations of regen erat ive o ptio ns and s ervo am plif iers m a y onl y be use d. Oth erw ise, a f ire m ay oc cur. (1) Combination and regenerative power The po wer v alues in th e tabl e are r esist or-g enerat ed po wers a nd n ot rat ed po we[...]

  • Pagina 405

    14 - 20 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT (2) Se lect ion of the r egen erat ive op tion Use the fol lowi ng metho d when rege ner ation oc curs co ntin uousl y in vert ical m otion ap plica tions or when it is des ired to m ake an in-de pth se lecti on of the r egener ativ e opti on. (a) R egen erati ve e nerg y calc ulat ion Use th e followin[...]

  • Pagina 406

    14 - 21 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT (b) L osses of s ervo m otor and s ervo amplif ier in reg ene rative m ode The f ollowi ng tab le lis ts the ef ficienc ies a nd ot her d ata o f the s ervo m otor and s ervo amplif ier i n the regener ati ve m ode. Servo amplifi er I nverse efficienc y[%] Capac itor charging[J] Servo amplifier I nverse[...]

  • Pagina 407

    14 - 22 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT (3) Paramete r setting Set par ameter No.P A02 ac cor ding t o the opt ion to be us ed. Selection of regenerative option 00: Regenerative option i s not used For servo amplifier of 100W, regenerative resistor is not used. For servo amplifier of 200 to 7kW, built-in regenerative resistor is used. Supplie[...]

  • Pagina 408

    14 - 23 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT (a) MR -J3-3 50T or less MR- J3-20 0T4 or less Alwa ys rem ove th e wir ing fr om ac ross P- D a nd fit t he re genera tive option acros s P- C. The G3 and G 4 ter mina ls ac t as a t herm al sens or. G 3- G4 is d isco nnecte d whe n the r egener ati ve opti on ove rheats ab normally. D P C G4 G3 C P Se[...]

  • Pagina 409

    14 - 24 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT (b) MR-J3-350T4 MR-J 3-50 0T(4) MR-J 3-70 0T(4) Alwa ys rem ove th e wir ing ( acros s P-C) of t he ser vo am plifi er bu ilt-in r egen erati ve res istor and f it the regener ati ve optio n across P-C. The G 3 and G 4 ter mina ls ac t as a t herm al s ensor . G3- G4 is ope ned whe n th e reg enerat ive[...]

  • Pagina 410

    14 - 25 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT The dra wing belo w sho ws the MR- J3-3 50T4 a nd M R-J3-50 0T( 4). Ref er to sec tion 12. 1 (6) O utli ne drawin gs for the p ositi on of t he fix ing sc rew f or MR- J3-7 00T( 4). Built-in regenerative resistor lead terminal fixin g screw For the MR- RB51, MR-RB 3G-4, MR- RB5G -4, MR- RB34- 4 or MR-R [...]

  • Pagina 411

    14 - 26 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT (c) MR- J3-11 KT( 4) to M R-J 3-22KT (4) ( when using the suppl ied r egener ative res istor) W hen using t he r egener ati ve res istors sup plied to t he ser vo am plifi er, t he sp ecifi ed num ber of res istor s (4 or 5 r esist ors) mus t be co nnecte d in s eries. If th ey ar e con nected in par al[...]

  • Pagina 412

    14 - 27 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT (d) MR-J3-11KT(4)-PX to MR-J3 -22KT(4)-PX (when using the regenerative option) The MR-J 3-11KT (4)- PX to MR- J3-22 KT( 4)-PX ser vo a mplif iers ar e not supp lied wi th regen erati ve resist ors. W hen usin g any of these servo amplif iers, a lways use the MR-R B5E, 9 P, 9F, 6B-4, 60-4 and 6K -4 regen[...]

  • Pagina 413

    14 - 28 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT (5) Ou tlin e dim ension dra wings (a) MR-RB032 MR-R B12 [Unit: mm (in)] LA 5 LB TE1 6 6 1 5 6 1 6 8 1 4 4 1 2 A p p r o x . 6 A p p r o x . 1 2 Ap pro x. 20 LD 1.6 LC G3 G4 P C 6 mounting hole MR-RB TE1 Terminal block G3 G4 P C Terminal screw: M3 Tightening torque: 0. 5 to 0.6 [N m] (4 to 5 [lb in]) Mo[...]

  • Pagina 414

    14 - 29 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT (b) MR-RB30 MR- RB3 1 MR-RB32 MR- RB34- 4 MR-R B3M -4 MR-RB 3G-4 TE1 Terminal block G3 G4 P C Terminal sc rew: M4 Tightening torque: 1.2 [ N m ] (10.62 [lb in]) Mounting screw Screw size: M6 Tightening torque: 5.4 [ N m ] (47.79 [lb in]) Variable dimensions Regenerative option A B Mass [kg] ( Ib) MR-RB3[...]

  • Pagina 415

    14 - 30 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT (d) MR-RB5E MR- RB9P MR- RB9F MR- RB6 B-4 MR- RB60-4 MR- RB6 K-4 Terminal block G3 G4 P C Terminal sc rew: M5 Tightening torque: 2.0 [ N m ] (17.70 [lb in]) Mounting screw Screw size: M8 Tightening torque: 13.2 [ N m ] (116.83 [lb in]) Mass Regenerative option [kg] [Ib] MR-RB5E 10 22. 0 MR-RB9P 11 24. 3[...]

  • Pagina 416

    14 - 31 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT (f) MR-RB1H-4 Terminal screw: M3 Tightening torque: 0. 5 to 0.6 [N m] (4.43 to 5.31 [lb in]) G3 G4 P C Mounting screw Screw size: M5 Tightening torque: 3. 2 [N m] (28.32 [lb in]) Regenerative option Mass [kg] ([ lb]) MR-RB1H-4 1.1 (2.4) [Unit: mm (in)] TE1 6 2 149 173 6 Approx. 24 15 36 40 6 mounting ho[...]

  • Pagina 417

    14 - 32 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT 14.3 FR- BU2-(H) brak e un it POINT Use a 200V class brak e unit and a resistor unit with a 2 00V class servo amplif ier, and a 400V c lass brak e unit and a resistor unit with a 4 00V class servo am plifier . Com binatio n of dif ferent vo ltage cl ass units and ser vo amplif ier cannot be used. Instal[...]

  • Pagina 418

    14 - 33 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT 14.3.1 Sel ectio n Use a com binati on of ser vo amplif ier, br ake uni t and resi stor un it listed be low. Brake unit Resist or unit Number of connected units Per missib le continuous power [kW] Total resistanc e [ ] Applic able servo amplifier FR-BU2-15K FR-BR-15K 1 0.99 8 MR-J3-500T (Note) 200V clas[...]

  • Pagina 419

    14 - 34 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT 14.3.3 Connec tion ex am ple POINT Connectin g PR term inal of the brak e un it to P ter minal of the se rvo am plifier results in brak e unit m alfunction. Alwa ys connect the PR ter minal of the br ake unit to t he PR ter minal of the res istor unit. (1) Combination with FR-BR-(H) resistor unit (a) W [...]

  • Pagina 420

    14 - 35 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT (b) W hen c onnect ing t wo brak e un its to a ser vo am plifi er POINT To us e brake units with a p arallel c onnect ion, use t wo sets of FR-BU2 br ake unit. Com bination with ot her br ake unit res ults in alarm occur rence or malfunc tion. Always con nect the m as ter and slav e term inals (M SG and[...]

  • Pagina 421

    14 - 36 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT 17 5 EMG DOCOM DICOM ALM 1 NFB (Note 12) ALM RA1 MC SK MC ON OFF EMG Ser vo moto r thermal relay RA2 (Note 7) (Note 1) Power supply N/ P/ BUE SD PR B C A SD MSG (Note 4) (Note 6) P 1 P 2 P( ) N( ) C FR-BU2-(H) FR-BR Servo amplifier P PR TH2 TH1 (Note 5) MC Termin al block (Note 3) (Note 11) (Note 2) (No[...]

  • Pagina 422

    14 - 37 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT (2) Combination with MT-BR5-(H) resisto r unit NFB (Note 9) ALM RA1 MC SK MC ON OFF EM G Serv o motor thermal relay RA2 (Note 1) Power supply N/ P/ BUE SD PR B C A SD MSG (Note 3) (Note 6) RA3 17 5 EMG DOCOM DICOM ALM P 1 C N( ) FR-BU2-(H) MT-BR5-(H) Servo amplifier P PR TH2 TH1 (Note 5) MC RA3 (Note 7)[...]

  • Pagina 423

    14 - 38 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT (3) Precautions for wiring The c ables betwee n the s er vo am plif ier an d the br ake u nit, an d bet ween t he res isto r unit and t he brak e un it shoul d be as shor t as pos sible . Alwa ys twis t the c ab le longer than 5m (twist five t imes or m ore per on e meter ). Eve n when th e cab le is t [...]

  • Pagina 424

    14 - 39 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT 2) Contr ol c irc uit term ina l POINT Undertight ening ca n cause a cable d isconnect ion or m alfunctio n. Overtighte ning can cause a s hort circ uit or m alfunc tion due to d am age to the screw or t he brak e unit. A RES PC B SD BUE C MSG SD MSG SD SD Jumper Term inal b lock 6mm Sheath Co re W ire [...]

  • Pagina 425

    14 - 40 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT (5) Cr im ping t erm inals f or P and N term inals of s ervo ampl ifier (a) R ecomm ende d crim ping term inals POINT Always use recom mended c rimping t erm inals or equ ivale nt since s om e crimping t erm inals c annot be ins talled depend ing on th e size. Servo amplifier Brake unit Number of connec[...]

  • Pagina 426

    14 - 41 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT 14.3.4 Out line dim ension dr awin gs (1) FR-BU2- (H) brake un it [Unit: mm] FR-BU2-15K Rating plate 5 hole (Screw size: M4) 68 6 56 6 5 18.5 52 62 4 132.5 FR-BU2-30K FR-BU2-H30K 129.5 5 59 18.5 Rating plate 52 2- 5 hole (Screw size: M4) 5 108 6 6 96 FR-BU2-55K FR-BU2-H55K, H75K 18.5 Rating plate 52 72 [...]

  • Pagina 427

    14 - 42 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT (2) FR-BR- (H) resistor unit [Unit: mm] 2 C Control circuit terminal Main circuit terminal W1 1 Approx. 35 Approx. 35 204 Hanging bolt C C W 5 For FR-BR-55K/FR-BR-H55K, a hanging bolt is placed on two locations (Indicated below). (Note) (Note) Note. Ventil ation ports are provided on both sides and the [...]

  • Pagina 428

    14 - 43 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT 14.4 Power regener ation c onverter W hen using the po wer rege neration co nverter , set " 01" in par am eter No.PA02. (1) Selecti on The c onverter s c an co ntinu ousl y retur n 75% of th e nom inal r egener at ive po wer. T hey ar e appl ied to the servo am plifier s of the 5k to 22kW . Po[...]

  • Pagina 429

    14 - 44 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT (2) C onnect ion ex am ple (Note 7) Power supply NFB MC Servo amplifier L 11 L 21 L 1 L 2 L 3 SK ON MC BC NP C RDY SE Alarm output RDY output A B C 5m or less Operation ready MC OFF EMG ALM RA FR-RC-(H) Ready Power factor improving reactor FR-BAL R/L 1 S/L 2 T/L 3 B C R RX R SX S TX T Phase detection te[...]

  • Pagina 430

    14 - 45 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT (3) Outs ide dim ensio ns of t he p ower re gener atio n con verter s [Unit : mm] AA A C F K EE BA B E D 2- D hole Rating plate Front co ver Display panel window Mounting foot (removable) Mounting foot movable Cooling fan Heat generation area outside m ounting dimension Pow er regeneration converter A A[...]

  • Pagina 431

    14 - 46 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT 14.5 Power regener ation c omm on converter POINT Use the FR-C V for the ser vo am plifier of 200V clas s and th e FR-CV-H for that of 400V c lass. For deta ils of the power r egenerat ion com m on convert er FR-CV- (H), ref er to the FR-C V-(H) Ins tallat ion Gu ide (IB(N A)060007 5). Do not supp ly po[...]

  • Pagina 432

    14 - 47 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT The foll owing table lists the rest rictio ns. FR-CV- Item 7.5K 11K 15K 22K 30K 37K 55K Maximum number of connected servo am plifiers 6 Total of c onnectable servo amplifier c apacities [kW ] 3.75 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 27.5 Total of c onnectable servo m otor rated currents [ A] 33 46 61 90 115 145 215 Maxi[...]

  • Pagina 433

    14 - 48 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT (3) Connection diagram (a) 200V class S2/L 22 T2/L 32 DOCO M RA1 EMG C B R/L 11 S/L 21 T/L 31 R2/L 1 R2/L 12 S2/L 2 N/L P24 SD RDYB RDYA RSO SE A P/L T2/L 3 R/L 11 S/L 21 T/MC1 RES SD L 11 L 21 P N U V W EMG RA1 RA2 U V W 0HS2 0HS1 CN2 MC NFB FR- CVL FR-CV MC RA1 RA2 EM G OFF ON RESET SK MC P 1 DICOM Se[...]

  • Pagina 434

    14 - 49 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT (b) 400V class P( ) P 1 (Note 8) Stepdow n transfor mer DOCOM RA1 EMG C B R/L 11 3-phase 380 to 480VAC S/L 21 T/L 31 R2/L 1 S2/L 22 R2/L 12 T2/L 32 S2/L 2 (Note 3) P24 SD RDYB RDYA RSO SE A T2/L 3 R/L 11 S/L 21 T/MC1 RES SD (Note 1) L 11 L 21 N( ) U V W (Note 1) EMG (Note 2 ) RA1 RA2 24VDC power supply [...]

  • Pagina 435

    14 - 50 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT (4) Se lect ion ex am ple of wire s used f or wiri ng POINT Selectio n con dition of wire si ze is as f ollows. W ire ty pe: 60 0V Polyviny l c hlorid e insul ated wire (IV wire) Constructio n condit ion: O ne wire is constr ucted i n the air (a) W ire sizes 1) Acr oss P- P( ), N-N( ) The f ollowi ng ta[...]

  • Pagina 436

    14 - 51 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT (b) Exam ple of select ing th e wire s izes W hen conn ecting mult iple servo am plifier s, al ways use j unctio n term ina ls for wirin g the s ervo am plifie r term inals P, N. A lso, co nnect the s ervo am plifi ers in the or der of lar ger to sm aller c apac ities . 1) 200V c lass R2/L 1 S2/L 2 T2/L[...]

  • Pagina 437

    14 - 52 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT 2) 400V c lass P R2/L 1 S2/L 2 T2/L 3 R/L 11 S/L 21 T/MC1 P/L+ N/L- P N 22mm 2 P N N P N 14mm 2 5.5mm 2 2mm 2 14mm 2 5.5mm 2 2mm 2 2mm 2 FR-CV-H55K Servo amplifier (7kW) Servo amplifier (3.5kW) Servo amplifier (2kW) Overall wiring length 5m or less First u nit: 22mm 2 assuming that the total of servo am[...]

  • Pagina 438

    14 - 53 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT (6) S pecif ica tions Power regeneration comm on converter FR-CV- Item 7.5K 11K 15K 22K 30K 37K 55K Total of c onnectable servo amplifier c apacities [kW] 3.75 5. 5 7.5 11 15 18.5 27.5 Maximum s ervo amplifi er capacity [kW] 3. 5 5 7 11 15 15 22 Total of c onnectable servo m otor rated curren ts [A ] 33[...]

  • Pagina 439

    14 - 54 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT 14.6 Extern al dynam ic brake POINT Configure up a sequ ence whic h switc hes off the contac t of the brak e unit af ter (or as s oon as) it has turne d off the servo on s ignal at a po wer failur e or failure. For the brak ing tim e taken when the d ynamic br ake is oper ated, ref er to section 13.3 . [...]

  • Pagina 440

    14 - 55 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT (2) C onnect ion ex am ple NFB L 11 L 21 U V W U V W M Servo amplifier Serv o motor RA2 MC SK MC ON OFF ALM RA1 Operation-ready EMG L 3 L 2 L 1 (Note 5) Power supply 13 U 14 V W External dynamic brake a b (Note 1) P P 1 (Note 2) (Note 4) EMG 17 1 SD Plate DB (Note 3) DOCOM 5 DICOM ALM 15 CN6 RA2 MC 24VD[...]

  • Pagina 441

    14 - 56 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT Servo moto r rotation Coasting ALM RA1 ON OFF Forced stop (EM G) Absent Invalid Valid Sho rt Open a. Timing chart at alarm occurrence b. Timing chart at Forced stop (EMG) validity Dynamic brake Base ON OFF Coasting Dynamic brake Dynamic brake Present Forwar d rota tio n 0r/ mi n (Note 2)15 to 60ms (Note[...]

  • Pagina 442

    14 - 57 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT (3) Out lin e dim ens ion dr awi ng (a) DBU-11K DBU-15 K DBU- 22K UV W D 100 D 5 C E G F 2.3 Terminal block Scr ew : M3.5 Screw : M4 B A 5 E 13 14 E (GND) ab [Un it: mm] Tightening torque: 1.2 [N m](10.6 [lb in]) Ti g htenin g torque: 0.8 [N m] ( 7 [lb in] ) Dynamic brake A B C D E F G Mass [kg]( [Ib]) [...]

  • Pagina 443

    14 - 58 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT (b) DBU-11K-4 DBU-22K- 4 [Unit: mm] 15 51 25 15 73. 75 7 25 150 10 200 170 178.5 179.5 15 260 280 43 10 2- 7mounting hole 195 228 26 26 210 2.3 Mass: 6.7[kg] (14.8 [lb]) a TE1 Tightening torque: 0.8[N m](7[lb in]) Scre w: M3 .5 b 13 14 Terminal block W V U Tightening torque: 1.2 [N m](10.6[lb in]) Scre [...]

  • Pagina 444

    14 - 59 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT 14.7 Batter y MR-J3BAT POINT The revis ion (E dition 44) of the D angerous Goods Rule of the Internat ional A ir Trans port Assoc iation (I ATA) went i nto ef fect on J anuar y 1, 2003 and was enforc ed imm ediatel y. In this r ule, "pro visions of the l ithium and lithium ion batteries" were [...]

  • Pagina 445

    14 - 60 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT 14.8 Heat s ink outsid e m ounting attac hment ( MR-J3ACN) Use the hea t sink outsid e mou ntin g attac hment to m ount the heat gener ation area of the s erv o ampl ifier in th e outsid e of th e co ntrol b ox t o diss ipate ser vo am plifier -ge nerate d heat to th e outs ide of the b ox an d reduc e [...]

  • Pagina 446

    14 - 61 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT (3) Fi tting m eth od Attachment Fit usi ng the assembling screws. Servo amplifier Attachment Servo amplifier Punched hole Control box a. Assembling the heat sink outside mounti ng attachment b. Installation to the control box (4) Out lin e dim ens ion dr awi ng [Unit: mm] 236 280 Approx.260 20 3.2 105 [...]

  • Pagina 447

    14 - 62 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT 14.9 Selecti on exam ple of wires POINT W ires indicated i n this s ection ar e separat ed wires . W hen using a c able fo r power lin e (U, V, and W ) between th e serv o amplif ier and s ervo m otor, us e a 600V gra de EP ru bber ins ulated c hloropre ne sheath c ab-tir e cabl e (2PNCT ). For selec ti[...]

  • Pagina 448

    14 - 63 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT (a) W hen using the 60 0V P olyvin yl chlor ide ins ulated wire (I V wire) Selec tion exam ple of wire size when usin g IV wires is indic ated be low. Table 14. 1 W ire size sel ection ex am ple 1 (IV wi re) Wir es [ mm 2 ] (Note 1, 4) Servo amplifi er 1) L 1 L 2 L 3 2) L 11 L 21 3) U V W 4) P C 5) B 1 [...]

  • Pagina 449

    14 - 64 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT (b) W hen using the 60 0V Gr ade heat- resis tant pol yvin yl chlor ide insu late d wire (HI V wire) Selec tion exam ple of wir e si ze whe n usin g HI V wires is indic ated b elo w. For t he wir e ( 8)) for po wer regener atio n conv erter (FR- RC-(H )), use the IV wire i ndicate d in (1) (a) in this s[...]

  • Pagina 450

    14 - 65 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT (c) Se lec tion ex am ple of cri mping t erm inals Selec tion exam ple of crim pi ng term inals for the se rvo a m plifier term inal box wh en u sing t he wires mentioned in (1) (a) and (b) in thi s section is indicated below . Servo am plifier side c rimping terminals Applic able tool Symbol (Not e 2) [...]

  • Pagina 451

    14 - 66 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT (2) W ires for cables W hen fabric ating a c able, u se the wir e mode ls gi ven i n the follo wing t able or eq uiva lent. Table 14. 3 W ires for option cables Char acterist ics of on e co re Type Mo del Length [m(ft)] Core size [mm 2 ] Number of cores Structure [wir es/ mm] Conductor resistance [ /mm][...]

  • Pagina 452

    14 - 67 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT (3) CC- Link twiste d cab le POINT For the ca bles other than th e one indic ated here, ref er to the op en field network CC-Link catalog (L (NA)741 08143). The s pecif icati ons of the t wis ted cab le us able i n CC-L ink and t he recom m ended c able are in dicat ed b elow. If the c able used is ot h[...]

  • Pagina 453

    14 - 68 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT 14.10 No-f use break ers, f uses, m agnetic co ntactors Alwa ys use one no- fuse bre aker and on e m agnetic cont actor with o ne ser vo am plif ier. W hen us ing a fuse instea d of the no-fuse bre aker, use the one ha ving t he spec if icatio ns gi ven i n th is se ction. No-fuse break er Fuse Servo am[...]

  • Pagina 454

    14 - 69 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT 14.11 Po wer factor impr oving DC reac tor POINT For the 100 V po wer suppl y type (MR-J 3- T 1), the po wer f actor im proving DC reactor c annot be us ed. The po wer f actor impr oving DC react or increas es th e for m factor of the s ervo amplif ier's input curre nt to impr ove the po wer fac to[...]

  • Pagina 455

    14 - 70 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT Dim ensions [mm] Servo am plifi er Power factor improving DC reacto r Outline drawing A B C D E F L G H Moun ting screw size Mass [kg(lb)] Wi re [mm 2 ] (Note ) MR-J3- 10T 20T FR-BE L-0.4K 110 50 94 1.6 95 6 12 M3.5 25 M5 0.5(1. 10) MR-J3- 40T FR-BE L-0.75K 120 53 102 1.6 105 6 12 M4 25 M5 0.7(1.54) MR-[...]

  • Pagina 456

    14 - 71 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT 14.12 Po wer fact or im proving reac tors The po wer f actor im proving react ors im pro ve the phase fac tor b y increas ing the f orm factor of ser vo am plif ier's input c urr ent. It can reduce the power capacity . The inp ut power fact or is im prove d to be about 90 %. For use wi th a 1-phas [...]

  • Pagina 457

    14 - 72 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT Dimensions [mm] Servo am plifi er Model W W 1 H D D1 C Moun ting screw size Termi nal screw size Mass [kg (lb)] MR-J3- 10T 20T 10T1 FR- BAL-0.4K 135 120 115 59 45 0 -2.5 7.5 M4 M3.5 2.0 (4.41 ) MR-J3- 40T 20T1 FR-BAL-0.75K 135 120 115 69 57 0 -2.5 7.5 M4 M3.5 2.8 (6.17 ) MR-J3- 60T 70T 40T1 FR- BAL-1.5K[...]

  • Pagina 458

    14 - 73 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT 14.13 Rela ys (rec omm ended) The fol lowing rela ys shoul d be used wit h the int erfac es. Interf ace Selection example Relay used for digit al input command signals (interfac e DI-1) To prevent defective contacts , use a relay for small signal (twin contact s). (Ex.) Om ron : type G2A , MY Relay used[...]

  • Pagina 459

    14 - 74 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT 14.15 No ise reduc tion tech niques Noises are class ifie d into ex ternal noises which en ter the ser vo am plifier to cause it to malf unct ion and th ose radiat ed b y the s ervo am plifier to ca use peri phera l dev ices t o m alfunct ion. Since t he serv o ampl ifier is a n electro nic devic e whic[...]

  • Pagina 460

    14 - 75 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT (c) T echni ques f or no ises r adiat ed b y the s ervo ampl ifier that c aus e perip heral devic es t o m alfunct ion Noises pro duced by the ser vo am plifier are class ified int o thos e radi ated f rom the cabl es co nnecte d to the ser vo am plif ier an d its m ain c ircu its ( input a nd o utput c[...]

  • Pagina 461

    14 - 76 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT Noise transmiss ion route Suppression techniques 1) 2) 3) When meas uring instrum ents, rec eivers, sens ors, etc. which handle weak s ignals and m ay malfunc tion due to noise and/ or their si gnal cabl es are contai ned in a control bo x together with the servo am plifi er or run near the s ervo ampli[...]

  • Pagina 462

    14 - 77 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT (b) Surge suppresso r The rec omm ended s urg e suppr ess or for inst allat ion to an AC rela y, AC va lve, or the like ne ar th e ser vo am plifier is s hown belo w. Us e this produc t or equ iva lent. MC Surge suppressor Relay Sur ge sup presso r This distance should be short (within 20cm). (Ex.) 972 [...]

  • Pagina 463

    14 - 78 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT (c) Cab le cl amp f ittin g AER SBAN - SET Gener ally , the ear th of th e shie lded cabl e m ay only be connecte d to th e conne ctor 's SD ter minal . However , the eff ect can be i ncreas ed b y directl y connec ting the ca ble to an eart h plate as s hown bel ow. Instal l the e art h plat e nea[...]

  • Pagina 464

    14 - 79 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT (d) Lin e no ise f ilter (F R-BSF 01, FR -BLF) This filter is eff ective in su ppr essing nois es rad iate d fro m the power supp l y side an d out put s ide of the servo am pl ifier and a lso i n sup pressi ng h igh-f reque ncy leak age c urre nt ( zero-ph ase c urrent) espec ial ly wi thin 0.5 MHz to [...]

  • Pagina 465

    14 - 80 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT (f) Varistors for input po wer supp ly (Rec omm ended) Varist ors ar e eff ecti ve to preve nt exo geno us no ise a nd l ightn ing sur ge f rom enter ing the ser vo am plif ier. W hen using a var istor , conn ect it bet ween eac h p hase o f the i nput power s uppl y of t he equ ipment. For varist ors, [...]

  • Pagina 466

    14 - 81 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT 14.16 Leak age cur rent break er (1) Se lect ion m ethod High-f reque ncy ch opper c ur rents c ontro lled b y puls e width m odulat ion fl ow in t he A C ser vo circu its. Leak age cur rents c ont ainin g harm onic c onten ts ar e lar ger th an thos e of th e m otor wh ich is run with a comm erc ial po[...]

  • Pagina 467

    14 - 82 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT Table 14.4 Servo motor’s leak age current exampl e (Igm) Table 14. 5 Servo amplifier's leakage current exampl e (Iga) Servo motor output [k W] Leakage current [mA] Servo amplifi er capacity [kW] Leakage current [mA] 0.05 to 1 0.1 0.1 t o 0.6 0.1 2 0. 2 0. 75 to 3.5 (Note) 0.15 3.5 0.3 5 7 2 5 0.5[...]

  • Pagina 468

    14 - 83 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT 14.17 EMC f ilter ( recom mended) For com plia nce wi th the EM C direct ive of the EN St and ard, it is rec omm ended to us e the f ollo wing fi lter. Som e EMC filt ers ar e large i n leakag e current . (1) Co m bin ation wi th the servo a mplifi er Recommended f ilter (Soshi n Electric) Servo amplifi[...]

  • Pagina 469

    14 - 84 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT (3) Out lin e dra wing (a) EMC filte r HF3010A- UN [Unit: mm] M4 IN 3-M4 65 4 4-5.5 7 258 4 273 2 288 4 300 5 3-M4 85 2 32 2 110 4 Approx.41 HF3030 A-UN HF-304 0A-UN J 2 H 2 G 1 F 2 E 1 D 2 3-L 6-K 3-L M C 1 B 2 A 5 C 1 Dimensi ons [mm] Model A B C D E F G H J K L M HF3030A-UN HF3040A-UN 260 210 85 155 [...]

  • Pagina 470

    14 - 85 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT HF3100A- UN 2-6.5 8 M8 2- 6.5 145 1 165 3 M6 380 1 400 5 160 3 M8 TF3005 C-TX T X3020 C-TX TF3030C-TX [Unit: mm] 290 2 100 1 308 5 332 5 Approx.12.2 3-M4 16 16 6-R3.25 length8 M4 M4 125 2 140 1 155 2 IN 150 2 Approx.67.5 3 Approx.160 170 5 M4 3 M4 100 1[...]

  • Pagina 471

    14 - 86 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT TF3040 C-TX T F306 0C-TX [Unit: mm] K 2 L J H 5 M6 C 2 D 1 B 5 A 5 Approx.17 3-M6 22 22 8-M M4 M4 G 2 3-M6 F 1 E 2 IN D 1 D 1 Dimensi ons [mm] Model A B C D E F G H J K L M TF3040C-TX TF3060C-TX 438 412 390 100 175 160 145 200 Approx.190 180 Approx.91.5 R3.25 length 8 (M6)[...]

  • Pagina 472

    14 - 87 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT (b) Sur ge pr otect or RAV -781BYZ -2 4.5 0.5 1 3 2 41 1.0 28.5 1.0 28 1.0 4 .2 0.2 200 30 0 UL-1015AWG16 5.5 1 11 1 [Unit: mm] Black 1) 2) 3) Black B lack RAV -781BXZ-4 1 3 2 UL-1015AWG16 4 .2 0.2 5.5 1 11 1 28.5 1.0 200 30 0 28 1.0 41 1.0 4.5 0.5 [Unit: mm] 1) 2) 3) 4)[...]

  • Pagina 473

    14 - 88 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT 14.18 MR-HD P01 m anual puls e gener ator Use th e MR-HDP01 man ual pul se gene rato r to rota te the se rvo moto r. Using exte rnal in put si gnal s, the movi ng distanc e of the s ervo m otor can be spec ifie d in accor dance with pulses gen erated from MR- HDP01. T o do this specif icat ion, in t he [...]

  • Pagina 474

    14 - 89 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT (3) Terminal layout Signal Des cription 5 to 12V Power input 0V Common for power and signal A A-phase pulse output 5 to 0V A B 12V B B-phase pulse output (4) Installation 6 2 2 0 7 2 0 . 2 3- 4.8 Equally spaced Panel cut (5) Out lin e dra wing 8.89 7.6 M3 6 m ay only be installed 12V 0V A B 5V to 3-M4 s[...]

  • Pagina 475

    14 - 90 14. OPTIONS AND AUX ILIARY EQUIPM ENT MEMO[...]

  • Pagina 476

    15 - 1 15. COMMUNICATION FUNCTI ON 15. COMMUNICATION FUNCTION Using t he se rial c omm unic ation f unct ion of R S-422 , this serv o am plifier enab les s ervo o perat ion, param eter change , m onitor fu nctio n, et c. 15.1 Config uration (1) Single axis Opera te the s ingl e-ax is ser vo am plifier . I t is r ecom mended to us e the f ol lowing [...]

  • Pagina 477

    15 - 2 15. COMMUNI CATION FUNCT ION (b) Ca ble conne ction di agram W ire the ca bles as sho wn belo w. 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 12345678 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 (No te 4, 5) (Note 1 ) Axis 1 servo ampli fier CN3 connect or (RJ45 connecto r) LG P5D RDP SDN SDP RDN LG NC (Note 5) (Note 5) 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 12345678 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 LG P5[...]

  • Pagina 478

    15 - 3 15. COMMUNI CATION FUNCT ION 15.2 Comm unication sp ecific ations 15.2.1 Com munic ation o vervie w This ser vo am plif ier is des ign ed to s end a re ply o n r ece ipt of an instr uct ion. T he devic e wh ich g ives this instr uctio n (e .g. per sona l co m puter) is call ed a mas ter stat ion and t he de vice whic h sen ds a r epl y in r [...]

  • Pagina 479

    15 - 4 15. COMMUNI CATION FUNCT ION 15.2.2 Par ameter setting W hen the U SB/R S-422 c om munic ation f unc tion is us ed to opera te t he ser vo, s et t he c omm unica tion specif icat ions of t he ser vo a m plifier in t he cor resp ondin g par am eters. After s ettin g th e va lues of thes e par am eters, t hey are mad e va lid b y switc hing po[...]

  • Pagina 480

    15 - 5 15. COMMUNI CATION FUNCT ION 15.3 Protoc ol 15.3.1 T ransm ission dat a configurat ion Since up to 32 ax es m a y be c onnect ed to t he bus, add a sta tion num ber or gro up to the c omm and, d ata No., etc. to d eterm ine th e dest inat ion ser vo am plif ier of data comm unicati on. Set t he st ation num ber to eac h ser vo amplif ier usi[...]

  • Pagina 481

    15 - 6 15. COMMUNI CATION FUNCT ION 15.3.2 Char acter cod es (1) C ontrol c odes Code name Hexadecima l (ASCII code) Descripti on Personal comput er terminal ke y operation (General) SOH STX ETX EOT 01H 02H 03H 04H start of head start of text end of tex t end of tran smissio n ctrl A ctrl B ctrl C ctrl D (2) Codes for data ASCII c odes are use d. b[...]

  • Pagina 482

    15 - 7 15. COMMUNI CATION FUNCT ION 15.3.3 Err or codes Error c odes are used i n the foll owing c ases and a n err or cod e of singl e-code len gth is tr ansm itted . On rec eipt of data from the m aster statio n, th e sla ve stati on sen ds the error code c or respo nding to that data to the maste r station. The err or c ode s ent in uppe r case [...]

  • Pagina 483

    15 - 8 15. COMMUNI CATION FUNCT ION 15.3.5 T ime- out operation The m aster station transm its EO T when the sl ave st ati on does not star t rep ly oper atio n (STX is not rec eive d) 300m s af ter the m aster stat ion has en ded com muni cation oper atio n. 100m s after that, the m aster stat ion retran sm its the m ess age. T ime- out occur s if[...]

  • Pagina 484

    15 - 9 15. COMMUNI CATION FUNCT ION 15.3.7 In itiali zation After th e slav e stat ion is s witche d on, it cannot repl y to com munic ation until th e inter nal init ial izati on proc essi ng term inates. Hence, at p ower -on, or dinar y com m unicatio n shou ld be s tarte d af ter. (1) 1s or m ore tim e has elap sed af ter t he sla ve stat ion is[...]

  • Pagina 485

    15 - 10 15. COMMUNI CATION FUNCT ION 15.4 Comm and and d ata No. l ist POINT If the com m and and data No. are th e sam e, the desc ription m ay be dif ferent depending on m odels of s ervo am plif iers. 15.4.1 Read c omm ands (1) Sta tus displ ay (Com m and [0][ 1]) Command Data No. Descri ption Dis play item Frame length [0] [0] Current posi tion[...]

  • Pagina 486

    15 - 11 15. COMMUNI CATION FUNCT ION (2) Par ameter s (Com m and [0][4] [0][ 5] [0][6 ] [0][7] [0][ 8] [0][9]) Command Data No. Description Frame l ength [0] [4] [ 0] [1] Parameter group read 0000: Basic setting param eter (No.PA ) 0001: Gain filter paramet er (No.PB ) 0002: Extension setti ng parameter (No.PC ) 0003: I/O setting parameter (No. PD [...]

  • Pagina 487

    15 - 12 15. COMMUNI CATION FUNCT ION (4) Al arm histor y (Com mand [ 3][3]) Command Dat a No. Des cription A larm occurrence sequence Frame lengt h [1] [0] most rece nt ala rm [1] [1 ] first ala rm in past [1] [2] s econd alarm in past [1] [3] t hird alarm in past [1] [4] f ourth alarm in past [1] [5] Alarm number in alarm hist ory fifth alarm in p[...]

  • Pagina 488

    15 - 13 15. COMMUNI CATION FUNCT ION (6) Po int t able/p ositi on data (C omm and [4][ 0]) Command Data No. Description Frame length [4][0] [0][ 1] to [F][F] Positi on data read The decimal equivalent of the data No. value (hexadecimal ) corresponds to the Point table No. 8 (7) Po int t able/s peed d ata ( Comm and [ 5][0]) Command Data No. Descrip[...]

  • Pagina 489

    15 - 14 15. COMMUNI CATION FUNCT ION (14) O thers Command Dat a No. Description Fram e length [9] [0] Servo m otor si de pulse unit absolute posit ion 8 [9] [1] Comm and unit absolute position 8 [0] [2] [7] [0] Software version 16 15.4.2 W rite c ommands (1) Sta tus displ ay (Com m and [8][ 1]) Command Dat a No. Description S etting range Frame len[...]

  • Pagina 490

    15 - 15 15. COMMUNI CATION FUNCT ION (7) Po int t able/s peed d ata ( Comm and [ C][6]) Command Data No. Description Setting range Frame length [C][6] [ 0][1] to [F][F] Speed data write The decimal equivalent of the data No. value (hexadecim al) corresponds t o the Point table No. 0 to Permissible instantaneous speed 8 (8) Po int t able/ac celer at[...]

  • Pagina 491

    15 - 16 15. COMMUNI CATION FUNCT ION (14) T est op erati on m ode data ( Com mand [9 ][2] [A] [0]) Command Dat a No. Desc ription Setting range Fram e length [0] [0] [9] [2] [0] [1] Input signal for test operat ion Refer to sect ion 15.5.7. 8 [A] [0] Forc ed output of signal pin Refer to sect ion 15.5.9. 8 [1] [0] W rites the speed in the test oper[...]

  • Pagina 492

    15 - 17 15. COMMUNI CATION FUNCT ION 15.5 Detailed ex planations of comm ands 15.5.1 Data pr ocessi ng W hen the m aster s tati on tra nsm its a com mand d ata N o. or a com mand dat a No. data t o a sl ave stat ion, the ser vo am plif ier r eturns a repl y or dat a ac cordin g to the purpos e. W hen num erical valu es ar e repres ente d in these s[...]

  • Pagina 493

    15 - 18 15. COMMUNI CATION FUNCT ION (2) W riting the pr ocess ed data W hen the data to be wri tten is handl ed as dec im al, the dec im al point pos ition m ust be specif ied. If it is not specif ied, the dat a can not b e writte n. W hen the d ata is hand led as h exadec im al, sp ecif y "0" as t he dec im al point p ositi on. The da t[...]

  • Pagina 494

    15 - 19 15. COMMUNI CATION FUNCT ION 15.5.2 St atus disp la y (1) Read ing the stat us dis pla y nam e and un it Rea d th e status disp la y nam e and un it. (a) T ransm ission Transm it comm and [ 0][1] and t he d ata No. c orr espon ding t o the status disp la y item to be r ead, [0][0] t o [0][E]. ( Refer to s ection 1 5.4 .1.) (b) Reply The sla[...]

  • Pagina 495

    15 - 20 15. COMMUNI CATION FUNCT ION 15.5.3 Par ameter s (1) Spec if y the param eter grou p The gro up of the param eter s to be oper ated m ust be s pecif ied in adv ance t o rea d or write the p aram eter settin gs, e tc. W rite dat a to the ser vo am plifier as d escrib ed be low to s pecif y the param eter gr oup to b e operat ed. Command Data[...]

  • Pagina 496

    15 - 21 15. COMMUNI CATION FUNCT ION (4) Readi ng the sett ing Rea d th e param eter s etti ng. Spec if y the p aram eter gr oup in ad vanc e (refer to ( 1) in this s ect ion). (a) T ransm ission Transm it com mand [ 0][5] an d the d ata No. c orres pondi ng to t he p aram eter No. , [0][0 ] to [F ][F]. ( Refer to section 15.4.1 .) The da ta No. is[...]

  • Pagina 497

    15 - 22 15. COMMUNI CATION FUNCT ION (6) Paramete r write POINT If setting va lues need t o be c hanged with a h igh freq uenc y (i.e. one tim e or mor e per one hour), wr ite the setti ng values to th e RAM, not the EEP-ROM. The EE P-ROM has a lim itation in the num ber of write tim es and exceed ing this lim itation c auses the s ervo am plif ier[...]

  • Pagina 498

    15 - 23 15. COMMUNI CATION FUNCT ION 15.5.4 Ext ernal I/O signa l statuses (DIO d iagnosis ) (1) Re ading o f inpu t device sta tuses Read th e status es of the input devices . (a) T ransm ission Transm it com m and [1][2] an d the d ata N o. corr espon ding t o the input device . Command Data No. [0][0] [1][2] [0][1] (b) Reply The s lave st atio n[...]

  • Pagina 499

    15 - 24 15. COMMUNI CATION FUNCT ION (2) Ex terna l in put pi n status r ead Read th e ON /OFF st atuses of th e exter nal o utput p ins. (a) T ransm ission Transm it com m and [1][2] an d data N o. [4 ][0]. Command Data No. [1][2] [4][0] (b) Reply The ON /OFF status es of the input pins are s ent bac k. b31 b0 0:OFF 1:ON b1 Command of each bit is [...]

  • Pagina 500

    15 - 25 15. COMMUNI CATION FUNCT ION (3) R ead of t he st atus es of input devic es s witche d on th rough c om munic ation Read th e ON /OFF st atus es of the input d evic es s witche d on throug h com munic ation. (a) T ransm ission Transm it com m and [1][2] an d the d ata N o. corr espon ding t o the input device . Command Data No. [6][0] [1][2[...]

  • Pagina 501

    15 - 26 15. COMMUNI CATION FUNCT ION (4) Ex terna l outpu t pi n stat us r ead Read th e ON /OFF st atuses of th e exter nal o utput p ins. (a) T ransm ission Transm it com m and [1][2] an d data N o. [C ][0]. Command Data No. [1][2] [C][0] (b) Reply The s lave st atio n sends bac k the ON /OFF s tat uses of the o utpu t pins . b31 b0 0:O FF 1:ON b[...]

  • Pagina 502

    15 - 27 15. COMMUNI CATION FUNCT ION (5) R ead of t he sta tus es of output devic es Read th e ON /OFF st atus es of the out put d evices . (a) T ransm ission Transm it com m and [1][2] an d the data N o. cor respon din g to the out put de vice. Command Data No. [8][0 ] [1][2 ] [8][1 ] (b) Reply The s lave st atio n sends bac k the s tatus es of t [...]

  • Pagina 503

    15 - 28 15. COMMUNI CATION FUNCT ION 15.5.5 Dev ice ON/OFF POINT The O N/OFF s tates of all dev ices in the s ervo am plif ier are t he st ates of the data rec eived las t. Hence, when t here is a de vice whic h mus t be kept O N, send data which turns that device ON ever y time. Each i nput de vice c an be s witc hed on/ off . Howev er, whe n the [...]

  • Pagina 504

    15 - 29 15. COMMUNI CATION FUNCT ION 15.5.6 D isable/enab le of I/O devices (DIO) Inputs can be disab led i ndep endent ly of th e I/O devic es ON/OFF . W hen inputs ar e dis abled, the in put s ignals (dev ices) are reco gnized a s follow s. Among the input devi ces, EMG, LSP and LS N canno t be disa bled. Signal St atus Input de vi ce s (DI ) OFF[...]

  • Pagina 505

    15 - 30 15. COMMUNI CATION FUNCT ION 15.5.7 In put devic es ON/O FF (tes t operatio n) Each inpu t dev ices can be t urned on/of f for test oper atio n. when t he de vice to be s witche d of f ex ists in t he exter nal in put si gnal, also s witc h of f that i nput s ignal. Send c omm and [9] [2], data No . corr espond ing to the input devic e and [...]

  • Pagina 506

    15 - 31 15. COMMUNI CATION FUNCT ION 15.5.8 T est operat ion m ode POINT The tes t operatio n m ode is used t o conf irm operation. Do not use it for actual operation . If comm unication s tops for longer tha n 0.5s dur ing tes t operation, t he servo amplif ier dece lerates to a stop, r esultin g in servo lock . T o prevent t his, continue c omm u[...]

  • Pagina 507

    15 - 32 15. COMMUNI CATION FUNCT ION (2) JO G oper atio n Send the c omm and, data N o. and data as indic ated be low to exec ute JOG operat ion. Command : [8][B] Data No. : [0][0] Data : 0001( JOG operatio n) When LSP/LSN was turned OFF by external input signal or automatically Command : [9][2] Data No. : [0][0] Data : Forward rotation di rection [...]

  • Pagina 508

    15 - 33 15. COMMUNI CATION FUNCT ION (3) Pos ition ing op erati on (a) Op erati on proc edur e Send the c omm and, data N o. and data as indic ated be low to exec ute pos ition ing oper ation . Command : [8][B] Data No. : [0][0 ] Data : 0002 (positionin g operation) When LSP/LSN was turned OFF by external input signal or a ut omatically turned ON C[...]

  • Pagina 509

    15 - 34 15. COMMUNI CATION FUNCT ION (b) T empor ary sto p/rest art/r emaini ng dis tance clear Send the f oll owin g com mand, data No. an d data duri ng p ositi oning oper atio n to mak e dece lerat ion to a stop. Command Data No. Data [A][0] [4][1 ] STOP Send th e fo llowin g c omm and, da ta No. a nd d ata dur ing a tem porar y stop to m ake a [...]

  • Pagina 510

    15 - 35 15. COMMUNI CATION FUNCT ION (4) Single -step feed Set ne cessa ry items to th e point table be fore starti ng the sin g le-st ep fe ed. Send the c omm and, data No. an d data as indic ated bel ow to exec ute sing le-st ep feed. Command : [9][2] Data No. : [0 ][0] Data : 0002 0807 ( ST1 is ON) Opera tion start Command : [8][B] Data No. : [0[...]

  • Pagina 511

    15 - 36 15. COMMUNI CATION FUNCT ION (5) Ou tput s ignal pin ON/O FF ou tput s ignal ( DO) f orce d outpu t In the t est operat ion m ode, the ou tput s ignal pins c an be turne d on/ off ind epen dentl y of th e s ervo st atus. Using c omm and [9 ][0], d isabl e the output sign als i n adv ance. (a) C hoosing DO for ced o utput i n test opera tion[...]

  • Pagina 512

    15 - 37 15. COMMUNI CATION FUNCT ION 15.5.9 Alar m his tory (1) Alarm No. read Read th e alar m No. whic h oc curred in the past. T he a larm num bers and occurre nce tim es of No . 0 (l ast alarm ) to No . 5 (six th a larm in the past) are r ead. (a) T ransm ission Send c omm and [3][ 3] a nd data No. [1][0 ] to [1][ 5]. R efer to sec tio n 15.4. [...]

  • Pagina 513

    15 - 38 15. COMMUNI CATION FUNCT ION 15.5.10 C urrent alar m (1) C urrent alarm read Read th e al arm No. whic h is occurr in g curr entl y. (a) T ransm ission Send c omm and [0][ 2] a nd data No. [0][0]. Command Data No. [0][2 ] [0][0 ] (b) Reply The s lave st atio n sends bac k the a larm cur rently oc curr ing. 00 Alarm No. is transferred in hex[...]

  • Pagina 514

    15 - 39 15. COMMUNI CATION FUNCT ION 15.5.11 Po int table (1) Data read (a) Positio n data Read the po sition da ta of the poi nt tabl e. 1) Tr ansm ission Transm it com mand [ 4][0] an d an y of data No. [0][ 1] to [F][F] c orres pond ing to t he p oint ta ble to be rea d. Re fer to sectio n 15.4 .1. 2) Rep ly The s lave st atio n sends bac k the [...]

  • Pagina 515

    15 - 40 15. COMMUNI CATION FUNCT ION (c) A ccelera tion ti me con stant Read th e acc elerat ion tim e c onstant of t he poi nt tabl e. 1) Tr ansm ission Transm it com mand [ 5][4] an d an y of data No. [0][ 1] to [F][F] c orres pond ing to t he p oint ta ble to be rea d. Re fer to sectio n 15.4 .1. 2) Rep ly The s lave st atio n sends bac k the ac[...]

  • Pagina 516

    15 - 41 15. COMMUNI CATION FUNCT ION (e) Dwell Read the dwell of the poin t table. 1) Tr ansm ission Transm it com mand [ 6][0] an d an y of data No. [0][ 1] to [F][F] c orres pond ing to t he p oint ta ble to be rea d. Re fer to sectio n 15.4 .1. 2) Rep ly The s lave st atio n sends bac k the d wel l of t he re queste d po int tab le. 0 Hexadecima[...]

  • Pagina 517

    15 - 42 15. COMMUNI CATION FUNCT ION (2) Data write POINT If setting va lues need t o be c hanged with a h igh freq uenc y (i.e. one tim e or mor e per one hour), wr ite the setti ng values to th e RAM, not the EEP-ROM. The EE P-ROM has a lim itation in the num ber of write tim es and exceed ing this lim itation c auses the s ervo am plif ier to m [...]

  • Pagina 518

    15 - 43 15. COMMUNI CATION FUNCT ION (c) A ccelera tion ti me con stant W rite the ac celer atio n tim e const ant of the p oint ta ble. Transm it com m and [C][7] , an y of dat a No. [0][1] to [F][ F] c orresp ondin g to the point tab le to b e writ ten to, and the dat a. Refer to sectio n 15.4. 2. Command Data No. Dat a [C][7 ] [0][1] to [F] [F] [...]

  • Pagina 519

    15 - 44 15. COMMUNI CATION FUNCT ION (f) Auxiliar y fu nction W rite the auxil iary func tion o f the point ta ble. Transm it com m and [C][B ], a ny of d ata No. [0][ 1] to [F ][F] corresp ond ing to t he poi nt t able to be wr itten to, and the dat a. Refer to sectio n 15.4. 2. Command Data No. Data [C][B] [0][1 ] to [F][F] See below . 0 Hexadeci[...]

  • Pagina 520

    15 - 45 15. COMMUNI CATION FUNCT ION 15.5.12 Servo am plifier group d esignation W ith group se tting m ade t o the s lave s tations , data c an be tr ansm itted s imulta neous ly to t wo or m ore s lave statio ns se t as a group . (1) Gro up sett ing write W rite the gr oup desi gnatio n va lue to the s lave s tat ion. (a) T ransm ission Transm it[...]

  • Pagina 521

    15 - 46 15. COMMUNI CATION FUNCT ION 15.5.13 Ot her com mands (1) Se rvo motor side pul se unit absolut e positio n Read th e abs olute posit ion in the ser vo motor side puls e unit . Note t hat ov erflo w will occur in t he pos ition of 8 192 or more r evo lutions from the hom e pos ition. (a) T ransm ission Send c omm and [0][ 2] a nd data No. [[...]

  • Pagina 522

    16 - 1 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION 16. INDEXER POSI TIONING OPERATION POINT To ex ecute the in dexer pos itioning operatio n, param eter nee ds to be changed. Set the param eter No.PA01 to "1 ". This chapter pr ovid es the in dexer p ositi oning o perat ion m ethod us ing MR-J 3- T servo a mplifier. Any m atters not desc ribed i n t[...]

  • Pagina 523

    16 - 2 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION 16.1.3 Func tion lis t The f ollowi ng tabl e lists the funct ions of this ser vo. For detai ls of t he func tions , ref er to t he ref erenc e fie ld. Function Des cription Reference Automatic operat ion mode 1 (Rotation di rection specifying indexer) In t his operation m ode, the servo m otor rotates in th[...]

  • Pagina 524

    16 - 3 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION Function Des cription Reference Torque limit Servo mot or-torque is limited. Section 16. 3.2 (3) Section 16. 11.1 (9) Output signal (DO) forced output Output signal can be forced on/off independently of the servo status. Use this functi on for output signal w iring chec k, etc. Section 7.7. 4 Section 8.5. 7([...]

  • Pagina 525

    16 - 4 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION (2) W hen 2 s tatio ns are occ upie d RXn/RYn : 64 points each, R W rn/R W wn: 8 points each Program mable co ntroll er Servo amplifi er (R Yn) Servo am plifi er Program ma ble cont roller (RXn) (Note) Device No. D evice name (Note) Device No. Device name RY n0 Ser vo-on RX n0 Rea dy RY n1 Sta rt RX n1 In po[...]

  • Pagina 526

    16 - 5 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION Program mable co ntroll er Servo amplifi er (RW wn) Servo ampli fier Pro gramm able c ontroll er (RW rn) (Note 1 ) Address N o. Signal (Note 1 ) Address N o. Signal RW wn Monitor 1 (No te 2) RW rn Monitor 1 dat a lower 16 bit RW wn 1 Moni tor 2 (Note 2) RW wn 1 Monitor 1 data upper 16 bit RW wn 2 Instr uctio[...]

  • Pagina 527

    16 - 6 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION Device No. Signal name (Device name) Descrip tio n 1 stati on occupied 2 stations occupied Remar ks Rotation di rection specifying Turning on/ off RYn2 specifies the rotation direct ion at start. 1. Automatic operat ion mode 1 Rotation di rection changes according to the parameter No.PA14 sett ing. RYn2 is u[...]

  • Pagina 528

    16 - 7 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION Dev ice No . Signal name (Device name) Descri pti on 1 stat ion occupied 2 stations occupied Remar ks Monitor output executi on demand When RYn8 is turned ON, the following data and signals are set. At the same t ime, RXn8 turns ON. While RY n8 is ON, t he monitor values are kept updated. 1) When 1 s tation [...]

  • Pagina 529

    16 - 8 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION Dev ice No . Signal name (Device name) Descrip tio n 1 st ation occupied 2 stations occupied Remar ks Position i nstruction execution demand When RY(n 2) is turned on, the nex t st ation number set in the remote regist er RWwn 4 is se t. When it i s set to t he servo am plifier, the res pond code indicating [...]

  • Pagina 530

    16 - 9 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION Dev ice No . Signal name (Device name) Descrip tio n 1 st ation occupied 2 stations occupied Remar ks Speed selection 1 RY(n 2)C Speed selection 2 RY(n 2)D Speed selection 3 Set the s ervo mot or speed, accel eration time c onstant, and decelerati on time constant for positioning operation by selecti ng the [...]

  • Pagina 531

    16 - 10 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION (2) Ou tput sign als (Out put devi ce) POINT The output devices can be used f or both the rem ote output an d the extern al out put si gnal s of CN6 connect or. The sig nal wh ose De vice No. fi eld has an o bliqu e line can not be used i n CC-L ink . Device No. Signal name (Device name) De scrip tio n 1 st[...]

  • Pagina 532

    16 - 11 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION Device No. Signal name (Device name) De scrip tio n 1 station occupied 2 stations occupied Warning RXnA turns ON when a w arning occurs. When no warning has occurred, RXnA turns OFF within about 1s after power-on. RX nA RX nA Battery wa rning RXnB turns ON when Open battery cable warning (A92) or Battery wa[...]

  • Pagina 533

    16 - 12 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION Device No. Signal name (Device name) De scrip tio n 1 station occupied 2 stations occupied Trouble A t rouble is assigned to the CN6-15 pin as an ex ternal output signal . RX (n 1)A or RX(n 3)A turns ON when the protective circuit is activat ed to shut off the base circuit. When no alarm has occurred, RX(n [...]

  • Pagina 534

    16 - 13 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION Remote register 1 station occupied 2 stations occupied Signal name Description Setting range RW wn 3 RW wn 3 Writing data Sets the written dat a used to perfo rm parameter or point table data write, alarm hist ory clear or the like. Setting the written dat a to R W wn 3 and turning RYn9 to ON writes the dat[...]

  • Pagina 535

    16 - 14 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION 16.2.3 Moni tor cod es To dem and 32-b it data when 2 stat ions ar e occu pied, spec if y the lo wer 16-bit code No. Us e any of the instr uctio n codes 0101 to 0 11C to r ead t he d ecim al poi nt pos itio n (m ultipl ying f actor) of the st atus i ndica tion. Sett ing an y code No. t hat is not give n in [...]

  • Pagina 536

    16 - 15 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION 16.2.4 Instr uction c odes (R W wn 2 RW wn 3) Refer t o sec tion 3. 6.2 f or th e instr uction co de tim ing ch arts. (1) Read in struction cod es The word data r eques ted t o be re ad wi th the i nstruct ion c ode 00 00h t o 0AFF h is r ead b y Read c ode (R W rn 3). Set the c om mand c ode N o. corr espo[...]

  • Pagina 537

    16 - 16 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION Code No. Item/Funct ion Reading data (RW rn 3) cont ents (Serv o amplifier P rogrammable controller) 0040h Input device status 0 Reads the statuses (OFF/ON) of the input devices. bit 0 t o bit F i ndicate the OFF/ON st atuses of the corres ponding input devices. bi t Fb i t 0 bit Device bi t Devic e 0 Servo[...]

  • Pagina 538

    16 - 17 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION Code No. Item/Funct ion Reading data (RW rn 3) cont ents (Serv o amplifier P rogrammable controller) 0050h Output device st atus 0 Reads the statuses (OFF/ON) of the Output devices. bit 0 t o bit F i ndicate the OFF/ON st atuses of the corres ponding output devices. bi t Fb i t 0 bit Device bi t Devic e 0 R[...]

  • Pagina 539

    16 - 18 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION Code No. Item/Funct ion Reading data (RW rn 3) cont ents (Serv o amplifier P rogrammable controller) 0081h Energization time Reads the energization tim e from shipment. Returns t he energizati on time [h]. Energization time 0082h Power ON frequency Reads the number of power-on tim es from ship ment. Returns[...]

  • Pagina 540

    16 - 19 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION Code No. Item/Funct ion Reading data (RW rn 3) cont ents (Serv o amplifier P rogrammable controller) 0200h P arameter group reading Reads the parameter group to be read with code No.8200h to be written. Parameter gr oup 0: Basic se tting parameters (No.PA ) 1: Gain/filter parameters (No.PB ) 2: Extension se[...]

  • Pagina 541

    16 - 20 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION (2) W rite instruction c odes Set th e data, whic h was re queste d to be writt en with the instructi on code 8010h to 91FFh . Set t he inst ructi on cod e No. corr espon ding t o the item to Ins truct ion c ode (RW wn 2) an d the writt en data to W riting d ata ( RW wn 3). T he c odes a nd ans wer d ata ar[...]

  • Pagina 542

    16 - 21 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION Code No. Item W riting data (RWwn 3) c ontents (Programmable c ontroller Servo a m plifier ) 8701h to 87FFh Accelerat ion time constant data RAM command of point table Writes the accelerat ion time constants of point table No.1 to 255 to RAM. These values are cleared when power is switched off. The decimal [...]

  • Pagina 543

    16 - 22 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION 16.2.5 Resp ond codes (RW rn 2) If an y of th e moni tor c odes, instruc tion c od es, Nex t stat ion, Point table N os./ Speed comm and d ata set to t he rem ote regis ter is outs ide the se tting r ange, the c orres pondi ng error cod e is s et t o respo nd co de (RW wn 2). "00 00" is se t if th[...]

  • Pagina 544

    16 - 23 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION 16.3 Signal 16.3.1 Sig nal (de vice) exp lanation POINT In the index er posit ioning o peration, devices assigne d to th e CN6 conn ector cannot be chang ed. (1) I/O device (a) Input device Device Sym bol Connector pin No. Functions/Applicat ions Forced st op E MG CN6-1 Turn EMG off (open between commons) t[...]

  • Pagina 545

    16 - 24 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION (b) Output device POINT Output de vices ass igned to the CN6 c onnector pins ca n be used with the rem ote output of the CC- Link comm unication f unction. Device Sym bol Connector pin No. Functions/Applicat ions Ready RD CN6-14 RD turns ON when the servo amplifier is ready to operate after servo-on. Troubl[...]

  • Pagina 546

    16 - 25 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION (3) Output signals Refer t o sect ion 4. 8.2 for the ou tput interf aces (s ymbo ls in t he I/O D ivis ion fi eld in the tab le) of the corres pondi ng co nnector pi ns. Device Sym bol Connecto r pin No. Functi ons/Applications I/O divisi on Encoder A-phas e pulse (different ial line driver) LA LAR CN6-11 C[...]

  • Pagina 547

    16 - 26 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION 16.3.2 Detai led desc riptio n of s ignals (dev ices) (1) For ward rotat ion s tart rev erse r otation star t tem porar y stop/res tart (a) A s tart (R Yn1) sho uld m ake th e sequ enc e whic h ca n be us ed af ter t he mai n cir cuit has b een establ ished . T hese s igna ls ar e inv alid if it is s witch [...]

  • Pagina 548

    16 - 27 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION (b) R ough m atch The f ollowin g tim ing chart s sho w the relat ionsh ips b etwee n the sig nal and t he posi tion com mand genera ted in the ser vo am plifi er. T his t iming can be ch ange d using par ameter No.PC 11 ( rough matc h output r ange) . RXn 2 turns ON in t he ser vo-on status . Forw ard rota[...]

  • Pagina 549

    16 - 28 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION (3) Torque limit CAUTION If the t orque l imit is canc eled d uring s ervo l ock, the s erv o motor ma y suddenl y rotate accor ding to pos ition deviat ion i n res pect to the c omm and pos ition. POINT In the index er posit ioning o peration, the torqu e lim it 2 becom es autom aticall y eff ective depen [...]

  • Pagina 550

    16 - 29 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION 16.4 Switc hing po wer on f or the f irst tim e W ARNING Do no t oper ate t he s witches with wet ha nds. You m ay get an electr ic s hock . CAUTION Befor e star ting o perat ion, check the par am eters. Som e mac hines m ay per form unexpec ted o perat ion. Take s afet y measur es, e. g. pro vide c overs ,[...]

  • Pagina 551

    16 - 30 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION 16.4.2 W iring chec k (1) Power supply system wiring Befor e switc hing on t he mai n circ uit and co ntrol c ircu it po wer sup plies, check th e foll owing item s. (a) Power supply system wiring The p ower s uppl ied to the power input term inals (L 1 , L 2 , L 3 , L 11 , L 21 ) of th e ser vo a m plifier[...]

  • Pagina 552

    16 - 31 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION 2) W hen reg enera tive optio n is us ed over 5kW for 20 0V c lass and 3.5kW f or 400V c lass The l ead of buil t-in r egener at ive res istor c onn ected to P t erm inal and C term inal of T E1 term ina l block shou ld not be con nect ed. The ge nerat ive br ake op tion shoul d be c onnec ted to P t erm in[...]

  • Pagina 553

    16 - 32 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION 16.5 Startup 16.5.1 Po wer on a nd off procedures (1) Power-on Switch po wer on in the f ol lowing proc edure. Alwa ys fo llow th is pr ocedur e at power- on. 1) S witch of f the servo- on ( RYn0). 2) Mak e sure that the st art ( RYn1) is of f. 3) Swi tch on th e m ain circui t power supp ly and contr ol ci[...]

  • Pagina 554

    16 - 33 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION 16.5.3 T est operat ion Befor e star ting ac tual opera tion, perf orm test op erati on to m ak e sure t hat t he mac hine op erates norm all y. Refer t o sec tion 1 6.5.1 for t he power on a nd of f m ethods of the s ervo am pl ifier . Test operat ion of ser vo mot or alone in JO G oper at ion of t es t op[...]

  • Pagina 555

    16 - 34 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION 16.5.4 Par ameter setting POINT The enc oder cable MR-EK CBL M-L/H for the HF-MP series HF- KP series servo m otor requires the pa ram eter No.PC22 s etting to be change d depending on its length. C heck whether the param eter is set c orrectl y. If it is not set corr ectl y, the enco der err or 1 (A16) wil[...]

  • Pagina 556

    16 - 35 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION 16.5.5 Poi nt table s etting Set neces sar y item s to the point ta ble bef ore st artin g operat ion. The foll owing ta ble indic at es the item s that must be set . Name D escrip tion Position data Not used in indexer positioning operation. Do not change this value by any means. Servo mot or speed Set the[...]

  • Pagina 557

    16 - 36 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION 16.6 Servo am plifier display On the ser vo am plifi er dis pla y (three- dig it, se ven-s egment disp la y), chec k the s tat us of comm unicat ion with th e CC-Link cont roller at po wer- on, ch eck the stat ion numbe r, and diagn ose a fault at oc currenc e of an a larm . (1) Display sequence Duri ng for[...]

  • Pagina 558

    16 - 37 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION (2) Indication list Indication S tatus Description b ## Waiting f or CC-Link communication Power of the CC-Link mast er module was switc hed on at the condition that the power of CC-Link m aster module is OFF. The CC-Link master m odule is faulty. (Note 1) d ## Ready The s ervo was switched on after com ple[...]

  • Pagina 559

    16 - 38 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION 16.7 Autom atic operation mode POINT In the abso lute pos ition det ection s ystem , the follo wing res triction c ondition applies f or the num ber of gears on m achine- side (para m eter No.PA06 CMX ) and ser vo motor s peed (N). W hen CMX 2000, N 3076.7 r /min W hen CMX 2000, N 3276.7–CMX r/m in W hen [...]

  • Pagina 560

    16 - 39 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION 16.7.2 Autom atic operation m ode 1 (Rotation direct ion spec ifying i ndexer) In th is oper atio n m ode, the ser vo m otor r otates in the fi xed dir ect ion and exec utes pos itioni ng to a sta tion. (1) W hen no t usi ng the r emote regis ter Selec t the st ation num ber us ing 8- bit dev ice of the n e[...]

  • Pagina 561

    16 - 40 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION 2) Setti ng the num ber of sta tions Set th e number of st ation s in the pa ramet er No .PC4 6. Parameter No .PC46 setting value 0000 to 0002 0003 0004 00FF Number of stations 2 3 4 255 Station No. No.0 No.1 No.1 No.0 No.2 No.1 No.0 No.3 No.2 No.0 No.1 No.254 (c) S etti ng the sp eed da ta Set the ser vo m[...]

  • Pagina 562

    16 - 41 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION Selec t the poin t tab le using the s peed s elect ion 1 (R Y(n 2)C) to s peed s elect ion 3 (RY(n 2)E). T ur n on the star t (R Yn1) to ex ecu te posit ionin g with t he spee d data set in the p oint tab le. Rota tion dir ect ion of the ser vo m otor is the dire ction s et in t he r otat ion dir ecti on sp[...]

  • Pagina 563

    16 - 42 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION (e) T iming ch art POINT Always exec ute a hom e po sition retur n. T he home pos itioning incom plete (A90) occ urs when tur ning on the s tart (RYn1) without executin g a hom e position r eturn. The tim ing c hart is s hown belo w. ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF Servo-on (RYn0) Torque limit value t o [...]

  • Pagina 564

    16 - 43 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION Note 1. Configure a sequence that changes the next station select ion (RYnA to RYnE and RY(n 2)3 to RY(n 2)5) and speed selection ( RY( n 2)C to R Y(n 2)E ) earlier, consideri ng the delay time of CC-Link communication. 2. When t he selected s tation number exceeds the val ue that is dividing number set in [...]

  • Pagina 565

    16 - 44 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION (b) Oth er par am eter se ttings 1) Set ting t he s ervo m otor r otation direct ion and a llocat ion d irect ion of stati on num bers Selec t the alloc ation direc tio n of st atio n num bers us ing the param eter N o.P A14 ( Sta tion No . dir ection select ion). Se ttin g is the s am e as that for whe n n[...]

  • Pagina 566

    16 - 45 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION (e) T iming ch art POINT Always exec ute a hom e po sition retur n. T he home pos itioning incom plete (A90) occ urs when tur ning on the s tart (RYn1) without executin g a hom e position r eturn. The tim ing c hart is s hown belo w. 1) W hen usi ng the speed da ta of po int table *3 (Note 6) 3ms or less Pa[...]

  • Pagina 567

    16 - 46 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION Note 1. Configure a sequence that changes RWwn 4 and RW wn 6 earlier, considering the delay time of CC-Link communication. 2. When t he selected s tation number exceeds the val ue that is dividing number set in t he parameter No.PC46 minus one, the next station warning (A97) occ urs 3. The start (RYn1) is i[...]

  • Pagina 568

    16 - 47 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION 2) W hen direc tl y settin g the ser vo m otor spe ed *3 Speed 1 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF *1 ON OFF *2 No.1 No.3 No.1 No.1 No.3 No.1 Speed 2 Speed 3 ON OFF ON (Note 6) Param eter No.PA1 1, PA1 2 Pa ra met er N o. PA1 1, P A12 Parameter No. PC35 Parameter No.PC35 Parameter No.PA11, PA[...]

  • Pagina 569

    16 - 48 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION Note 1. Configure a sequence that changes RWwn 4 and RW wn 6 earlier, considering the delay time of CC-Link communication. 2. When t he selected s tation number exceeds the val ue that is dividing number set in t he parameter No.PC46 minus one, the next station warning (A97) occ urs. 3. The start (RYn1) is [...]

  • Pagina 570

    16 - 49 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION 16.7.3 Autom atic op eration m ode 2 (Shortest ro tating i ndexer) In this oper atio n mode , th e ser vo m otor aut om atical ly cha nges t he d irect ion for the s hort est dista nce an d execu tes pos itio ning. (1) W hen no t usi ng the r emote regis ter Selec t the st ation num ber us ing 8- bit dev ic[...]

  • Pagina 571

    16 - 50 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION Selec t the poin t tab le using the s peed s elect ion 1 (R Y(n 2)C) to s peed s elect ion 3 (RY(n 2)E). T ur n on the s tart ( RYn1) to exec ute p ositi oning with t he spe ed data s et in the p oint ta ble. W hen on e stat ion is occupi ed, RY(n 2)C, RY (n 2)D, and R Y(n 2)E ar e not av ailab le so tha t [...]

  • Pagina 572

    16 - 51 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION (e) T iming ch art POINT Always exec ute a hom e po sition retur n. T he home pos itioning incom plete (A90) occ urs when tur ning on the s tart (RYn1) without executin g a hom e position r eturn. The tim ing c hart is s hown belo w. (Note 6) ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF *1 ON OFF *2 *3 [...]

  • Pagina 573

    16 - 52 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION Note 1. Configure a sequence that changes the next station select ion (RYnA to RYnE and RY(n 2)3 to RY(n 2)5) and speed selection ( RY( n 2)C t o RY(n 2)E) earlier, considering the delay time of CC-Link communic ation. 2. When t he selected s tation number exceeds the val ue that is dividing number set in t[...]

  • Pagina 574

    16 - 53 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION (b) Oth er par am eter se ttings (Sett ing th e num ber of s tat ions) Set the n um ber of s tations in t he param eter No .PC4 6. Sett ing is the s ame as that for the aut om atic operat ion m ode 1 . Ref er t o (1) ( b) 2) in s ectio n 16.7. 2. In the autom atic operat ion m ode 2, the station No . direct[...]

  • Pagina 575

    16 - 54 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION (e) T iming ch art POINT Always exec ute a hom e po sition retur n. T he home pos itioning incom plete (A90) occ urs when tur ning on the s tart (RYn1) without executin g a hom e position r eturn. The tim ing c hart is s hown belo w. 1) W hen usi ng the speed da ta of po int table ON OFF (Note 3) 4ms or mor[...]

  • Pagina 576

    16 - 55 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION Note 1. Configure a sequence that changes RWwn 4 and RW wn 6 earlier, considering the delay time of CC-Link communication. 2. When t he selected s tation number exceeds the val ue that is dividing number set in t he parameter No.PC46 minus one, the next station warning (A97) occ urs. 3. The start (RYn1) is [...]

  • Pagina 577

    16 - 56 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION 2) W hen direc tl y settin g the ser vo m otor spe ed (on l y when 2 st atio ns ar e occ upied) ON OFF 6ms or mo re (Note 3) 4ms or more ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF (Note 1) Speed 1 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF No.1 No.3 No.1 Speed 2 Speed 3 ON OFF *3 ON OF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF *1 *2 No.1 No.3 No.1 (Note 6) ON Para[...]

  • Pagina 578

    16 - 57 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION Note 1. Configure a sequence that changes RWwn 4 and RW wn 6 earlier, considering the delay time of CC-Link communication. 2. When t he selected s tation number exceeds the val ue that is dividing number set in t he parameter No.PC46 minus one, the next station warning (A97) occ urs. 3. The start (RYn1) is [...]

  • Pagina 579

    16 - 58 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION 16.8 Manua l operat ion m ode For adj usting the m achin e or hom e posi tion, J OG oper ation or index er J OG oper ation c an be us ed to m ove t he posit ion to an y posit ion. 16.8.1 Index er JOG operati on (1) Setting Set the de vices and par ameter s as ind icate d belo w accordi ng to th e purp ose o[...]

  • Pagina 580

    16 - 59 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION (3) Op erati on Turn on th e start ( RYn1) to oper ate the s ervo m otor with the s ervo m otor spee d, acc eleratio n tim e constan t, and dec elerat ion tim e cons tant set i n the poin t table No.1. T urning of f RYn1 m akes the servo m otor execu te posi tionin g to the s tatio n where t he ser vo m oto[...]

  • Pagina 581

    16 - 60 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION 16.8.2 JO G opera tion (1) Setting Set the de vices and param eters as ind icate d be low f or th e purpos e of use . In this c ase, t he n ext st ation selec tion 1 t o 8 (R YnA t o RYnE a nd R Y(n 2) 3 to R Y(n 2 )5) and t he spee d selec tion 1 to 3 (R Y(n 2)C to RY(n 2)E) are i nvali d. Item Devi ce/Par[...]

  • Pagina 582

    16 - 61 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION 16.9 Hom e position r eturn mode 16.9.1 Out line of hom e posi tion retur n Home pos it ion ret urn is perf ormed to m atc h the c omman d coor dinates with the mac hin e coord inates . In th e increm enta l syst em, hom e pos itio n ret urn is r equ ired ever y tim e input po wer is switc hed o n. In t he [...]

  • Pagina 583

    16 - 62 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION (2) Home position return parameter W hen perfor ming hom e posit ion retur n, s et eac h par ameter as f ollo ws. (a) C hoose the hom e pos iti on ret urn m ethod with p aram eter No. PC02 ( Hom e pos ition r eturn t ype). Home position return method 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: Not used in indexer post ioning operati[...]

  • Pagina 584

    16 - 63 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION 16.9.2 T orque lim it chang ing do g t ype home positi on retur n A hom e pos ition r etur n met hod us ing a prox imit y do g. W ith dece lerat ion st arted at the front end of the prox im ity dog, the pos ition where the f irst Z- phase sig nal is gi ven past the rear end of the dog or a m otion has be en[...]

  • Pagina 585

    16 - 64 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION (3) T iming ch art ON OFF ON OFF Home position return com pletion (RXn3/ZP) ON OFF Home position return speed parameter No.PC04 Point ta ble No .1 deceleration time constant Creep speed parameter No.PC05 Home position shift distance parameter No.PC06 Home position Point table No.1 acceleration time co nsta [...]

  • Pagina 586

    16 - 65 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION 16.9.3 T orque lim it chang ing dat a setting type home pos ition ret urn POINT Tor que limit bec omes effective af ter com pletin g the tor que lim it chang ing da ta setting t ype hom e position r eturn, so that when the ser vo m otor is rotat ed b y the exter nal forc e, a diff erence occ urs in bet ween[...]

  • Pagina 587

    16 - 66 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION 16.9.4 Hom e posit ion retur n autom atic retur n functio n If the cur rent p ositi on is at o r be yond the pr oxim ity do g in the hom e pos ition r eturn u sin g the prox im ity dog , this functi on star ts hom e pos itio n retur n after mak ing a r etur n to the posit ion where t he hom e pos ition r et[...]

  • Pagina 588

    16 - 67 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION 16.10 Abs olute pos ition det ection s ystem CAUTION If an abs olut e pos ition erase a larm (A25) or an absol ute p osition count er war ning (AE3) h as occ urred , al ways perfor m hom e posit ion s ettin g aga in. Not doing s o ma y cause u nexpec ted o perati on. POINT If the encoder cable is disconnect[...]

  • Pagina 589

    16 - 68 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION (3) Structure Component Description Servo amplifie r Serv o motor Use s tandard m odels. Batt ery MR-J3BAT Encoder c able Us e a st andard model. (Ref er to secti on 14.1.) (4) Outl ine of absolut e posit ion detec tion da ta com munic at ion For norm al o perat ion, as shown b elo w, the enc oder c ons ist[...]

  • Pagina 590

    16 - 69 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION (a) For MR-J 3-350T or l ess MR-J 3-20 0T4 or less POINT For the ser vo am plifier with a bat tery holder on the b ottom , it is not possib le to wire for the earth wit h the b attery inst alled. Insert the batter y after execut ing the earth wiring of the ser vo am plifier. Insert con nector into CN4. (b) [...]

  • Pagina 591

    16 - 70 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION 16.11 Para meters CAUTION Ne ver adj ust or chang e th e par ameter valu es ex trem ely as i t will m ake operat ion instab le. POINT For an y parameter whose s y mb ol is preceded by *, set the param eter va lue and switc h power of f once, then s witch it o n again to m ak e that param eter setting v alid[...]

  • Pagina 592

    16 - 71 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION (2) Paramete r write inhibit Parameter No. Symbol Nam e Initial value Unit Setting range PA19 *BLK Param eter write inhibit 000Ch Refer t o the tex t. POINT This param eter is m ade valid when po wer is switc hed o ff, then o n after setting. In the f actor y sett ing, th is s ervo am plif ier al lows c han[...]

  • Pagina 593

    16 - 72 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION (4) Se lectio n of regen erati ve op tion Parameter No. Symbol Nam e Initial value Unit Setting range PA02 *REG Regenerative option 0000h Refer t o the text. POINT This param eter is m ade valid when po wer is switc hed o ff, then o n after setting. W rong setting m ay cause t he regener ative option to b u[...]

  • Pagina 594

    16 - 73 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION (6) El ectro nic g ear Para m eter No. Symbol Nam e Initial value Unit Setting range PA06 *CMX Num ber of gears on machine-side 1 1 t o 16384 PA07 *CDV Number of gears on servo motor-side 1 1 t o 16384 CAUTION Fals e se tting will r esult in un expec ted fas t rota tion, c ausi ng inj ury. POINT This param [...]

  • Pagina 595

    16 - 74 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION (a) Ex am ple 1 W hen the num ber of pul ley teet h on the m achine-s ide is 50, an d the num ber of pul ley te eth on the s erv o motor side is 20. Number of pulley teeth on macine side: 50 Number of pulley teeth on servo motor side: 20 Parameter No.P A06: 50 Parameter No.P A07: 20 (b) Ex am ple 2 W hen th[...]

  • Pagina 596

    16 - 75 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION (7) Auto tuning Parameter No. Symbol Nam e Initial value Unit Setting range PA08 A TU Auto t uning mode 0001h Refer to the text. PA09 RS P Auto tuning respons e 12 1 to 32 Make ga in ad justment using a uto tuni ng. Re fer to section 9. 2 for de tail s. (a) Aut o tun ing m ode (p aram eter No. PA08) Selec t[...]

  • Pagina 597

    16 - 76 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION (8) I n-pos ition r an ge Para m eter No. Symbol Name Initial value Unit Setting range PA10 INP In-pos ition range 100 puls e 0 t o 10000 Set the r ange f or out putti ng the m ovem ent c omplet io n (RXnC) and t he in p ositi on (RX n1) in c omm and pulse un it. Servo motor Droop pulse In-position range [p[...]

  • Pagina 598

    16 - 77 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION (10) Station No. direct ion s elect ion Para m eter No. Symbol Nam e Initial value Unit Setting range PA14 *POL St ation No. di rection select ion 0 0 1 POINT This param eter is m ade valid when po wer is switc hed o ff, then o n after setting. Selec t the alloca tion direct ion of stat ion num bers usi ng [...]

  • Pagina 599

    16 - 78 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION (11) Encod er out put p uls e Parameter No. Symbol Nam e Initial value Unit Setting range PA15 *ENR Encoder output pulse 4000 puls e/ rev 1 to 65535 POINT This param eter is m ade valid when po wer is switc hed o ff, then o n after setting. Used to set t he enc oder pul ses (A- phas e, B- phase) out put b y[...]

  • Pagina 600

    16 - 79 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION 16.11.2 Gain/f ilter param eters (No.PB ) (1) Paramete r list No. Sy m bol Name In itial value Unit PB01 FILT A daptive tuning m ode (Adaptive fi lter ) 0000h PB02 VRFT Vibrati on suppression c ontrol tuni ng mode (Advanced vibration s uppression control) 0000h PB03 For manuf acturer setting 0000h PB04 FFC [...]

  • Pagina 601

    16 - 80 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION (2) Detail list No. Symbol Name and function Initi al value Unit Setting range PB01 FILT Adaptive tuning m ode (Adapti ve filter ) Select t he setting m ethod for f ilter tuning. S etting this parameter to " 1" (filt er tuning mode 1) automatically changes the machine resonance suppression f ilter[...]

  • Pagina 602

    16 - 81 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION No. Symbol Nam e and function Init ial value Unit Setting range PB02 VRFT Vibration s uppression cont rol tuning m ode (Advanced vi bration suppress ion control) The vibration suppressi on is valid w hen the param eter No.PA08 (auto tuning) setting is " 2" or " 3". When PA08 is " 1&[...]

  • Pagina 603

    16 - 82 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION No. Symbol Nam e and function Ini tial value Unit S etting range PB05 For manufacturer s etting Do not change this value by any means. 500 PB06 GD2 Ratio of load inertia m oment to servo m otor inerti a moment Used t o set the ratio of the l oad inertia m oment to the s ervo mot or shaft inertia moment. W h[...]

  • Pagina 604

    16 - 83 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION No. Symbol Name and function I nitial value Uni t S etting range PB14 NHQ1 Not ch shape s election 1 Used to selection the machi ne resonance suppression filter 1. Notch depth selection Settin g value Depth Gain 0- 4 0 d B Deep 1- 1 4 d B 2 -8dB 3 -4dB Shallow Notch width Settin g value Width 02 S tandard 1[...]

  • Pagina 605

    16 - 84 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION No. Symbol Name and function Init ial value Unit Setting range PB18 LPF Low-pass filter Set the low-pass filt er. Setting paramet er No.PB23 (low-pass filter selecti on) to " 0 " automaticall y changes t his parameter. When parameter No.PB23 is set to " 1 " , this parameter can be set ma[...]

  • Pagina 606

    16 - 85 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION No. Symbol Nam e and function Init ial value Unit Setting range PB25 For manufacturer s etting Do not change this value by any means. 0000h PB26 *CDP Gai n c hanging selection Select t he gain changi ng condition. (Ref er to sect ion 10.6.) Gain ch anging selecti on Under any of the f ollowing conditions, t[...]

  • Pagina 607

    16 - 86 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION No. Symbol Nam e and function Init ial value Unit Setting range PB33 VRF1B Gai n changing vibration suppress ion control vibration frequency set ting Set the vibration frequency for vibration suppres sion control when the gain changing is vali d. This para met er is made valid when the parameter No.PB02 set[...]

  • Pagina 608

    16 - 87 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION 16.11.3 Ex tension s etting p aram eters ( No.PC ) (1) Paramete r list No. Sy m bol Name Initial value Unit PC01 For manuf acturer setting 0000h PC02 *ZTY Home po siti on r eturn type 0000h PC03 *ZDIR Home pos itio n re turn d ire ctio n 0001h PC 04 ZR F Hom e position ret urn speed 500 r/min PC 05 C RF Cre[...]

  • Pagina 609

    16 - 88 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION No. Symbol Nam e and function Init ial value Unit PC49 0000h PC50 For manufact urer setting 0000h (2) Detail list No. Sym bol Name and function I nitial value Unit S etting range PC01 For m anufacturer s etting Do not change this value by any means. 0000h PC 02 * ZT Y Home pos ition return t ype Used to s e[...]

  • Pagina 610

    16 - 89 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION No. Symbol Nam e and function Initial value Unit S etting range PC1 3 Not used in indexer positioning operation. Do not change the parameter. 0 PC14 *BKC B acklash compens ation Used to set the backlash compensation m ade w hen the command directi on is reversed. This funct ion compensates f or the num ber [...]

  • Pagina 611

    16 - 90 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION No. Symbol Nam e and function Initial value Unit S etting range PC20 *SNO S tation number sett ing Used to specify the stat ion number for RS-422 serial communicati on and USB communic ation. Always s et one st ation to one axis of servo amplifier. I f one st ation number is set to two or m ore stations, no[...]

  • Pagina 612

    16 - 91 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION No. Symbol Nam e and function Initial value Unit Setting range PC29 For manufact urer s etting Do not change this value by any means. 0000h PC 30 *DS S Remot e register-bas ed positi on/speed spec ifying s ystem s election This param eter is made vali d when Posi tion/speed s pecific ation select ion (RY(n [...]

  • Pagina 613

    16 - 92 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION No. Symbol Nam e and function Initi al value Uni t Setting range PC46 *S TN Indexer positi oning operation number of stations/rotation Set the number of stations (divi ding number) per machine rotation. When the setting value is 2 or lower, the number of stations is set t o 2. 0000h Number of stations 0000h[...]

  • Pagina 614

    16 - 93 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION (4) Rough m atc h outpu t Rough m atc h (RXn 2) is output whe n the c omm and re m aining dis tanc e reac hes t he val ue set in p aram eter No.PC 11 (ro ugh m atch o utput r ange) . T he sett ing r ange is 0 t o 6553 5 [pu lse]. Ser vo motor speed ON OFF ON OFF Rough match (RXn2) In position (RXnC) Command[...]

  • Pagina 615

    16 - 94 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION (2) Detail list No. Sym bol Name and function Initial value Unit Setting range PD01 *DI A1 Input signal automatic ON s election 1 Select t he input devi ces to be automatically t urned ON. part is for manufacturer s etting. Do not set the value by any means. 0 0 Initial value BIN HEX Device name Forward rot[...]

  • Pagina 616

    16 - 95 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION No. Symbol Name and function Initial value Unit Setting range PD17 0000h PD18 For manufac turer set ting Do not change t his value by an y means. 0000h PD19 *DIF Response level setti ng Used to select the input. 000 Input filter If external input signal causes chattering due to noise, etc., input filter is [...]

  • Pagina 617

    16 - 96 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION No. Symbol Name and function Initial value Unit Setting range PD24 *DOP5 Function selecti on D-5 Select the out put status of the warning (RX nA). Selection of output device at warning occurrence Select the warning (RXnA) and t rouble (RX(n 1)A or RX(n 3)A) output status at warning occ urrence. 0 1 Settin g[...]

  • Pagina 618

    16 - 97 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION (3) St oppin g meth od when t he for ward s trok e end ( LSP) or r evers e str oke e nd (L SN) is val id The setti ng of the f irst d igit of param eter No.PD2 0 ena bles to se lect a s toppin g method of the ser vo m otor when th e for ward r otatio n str oke en d (LSP) or re verse r otati on strok e en d [...]

  • Pagina 619

    16 - 98 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION 16.12 TROUBLESHOOTING 16.12.1 T rouble at start-up CAUTION Exc essiv e adjus tment or ch ange of par ameter sett ing m us t not be m ade as it will mak e operat ion instab le. POINT Using the MR Conf igurator, you can r efer to unrotated servo m otor r easons, etc. The f ollowing f aul ts m ay occur a t st [...]

  • Pagina 620

    16 - 99 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION 16.12.2 Op eration at error occurrenc e An error occurr ing dur ing op erat ion wil l result in any of the s tatuses ind icated in the fo llowin g tabl e. Operation m ode Error location Desc ription Test operation CC-Link operat ion Servo operation S top Stop Servo side alarm occurrenc e CC-Link data commun[...]

  • Pagina 621

    16 - 100 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION 16.12.4 W hen alarm or war ning has occurr ed POINT Configure up a circ uit which will det ect the trouble (AL M) signal and turn off the servo- on (RYn 0) at occ urrence of an alar m. (1) Al arm s and warn ing list W hen a faul t occurs dur ing op erati on, the c orr espon ding al arm or warni ng is d isp[...]

  • Pagina 622

    16 - 101 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION (2) R emedies f or alarm s CAUTION W hen any alarm has occ urr ed, elim inate i ts caus e, en sure s afet y, then res et the alarm , and r estart opera tion . Oth erwis e, inj ur y may occ ur. If an abs olut e posit ion er ase (A2 5) occur red, alwa ys m ake hom e positio n sett ing again. Not d oing so m [...]

  • Pagina 623

    16 - 102 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION Display Nam e Defi nition Caus e Action A15 Mem ory error 2 (EEP-ROM) EEP-ROM fault 1. Faulty parts in the servo amplifier Checking method Alarm (A15) occurs if power i s switched on after disc onnection of all cables but the c ontrol circuit power supply cables. Change the servo amplifier. 2. The number o[...]

  • Pagina 624

    16 - 103 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION Display Nam e Defi nition Caus e Action 1. Wrong setting of parameter No. PA02 Set corr ectly . 2. Built-i n regenerative resistor or regenerative option is not connec ted. Connect c orrectly 3. High-duty operat ion or continuous regenerative operation c aused the permissibl e regenerative power of the reg[...]

  • Pagina 625

    16 - 104 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION Displa y Name Def inition Caus e Acti on 1. Short occurred in servo motor power (U, V, W). Correct t he w iring. A32 Overcurrent 2. Transistor (IPM, IGBT) of the servo amplifier faulty. Checking method Alarm (A32) occurs if p ower is switched on after U,V and W are disconnecte d. Change the servo amplifier[...]

  • Pagina 626

    16 - 105 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION Display Nam e Defini tion Cause Acti on A37 Paramet er error Paramet er setting i s wrong. 1. Servo amplifier f ault caused the paramet er setting to be rew ritten. Change the servo amplifier. 2. Regenerative option not used with servo amplif ier was selected in paramet er No.PA02. Se t p ar amet e r No .P[...]

  • Pagina 627

    16 - 106 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION Display Nam e Defi nition Cause Action A50 Overload 1 Load exceeded overload protect ion charact eristic of servo amplifi er. 1. Servo amplifier is used in excess of its continuous out put current. 1. Reduce load. 2. Check operation pattern. 3. Use servo motor that provides larger output. 2. Servo system i[...]

  • Pagina 628

    16 - 107 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION Display Nam e Defini tion Cause Acti on A52 Error exces sive 1. Acceleration/decelerati on time constant is too sm all. Increas e the acceleration/deceleration time consta nt. 2. Forward rotation torque limit (paramet er No.PA11) or reverse rotation torque limit (param eter No.PA12) are too sm all. Increas[...]

  • Pagina 629

    16 - 108 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION Display Nam e Defini tion Cause Acti on (Note) 888 Watchdog CPU, parts faul ty. Fault of parts in s ervo ampl ifier. Checking method Alarm (888) occurs if power is switched on after d isconnection of all cables but the control circuit power su pply cable. Change the servo amplifier. Note. At power-on, &quo[...]

  • Pagina 630

    16 - 109 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION If AE6 occur , the s ervo off status is es tablis hed. If an y ot her war ning oc curs , oper atio n can b e co ntinu ed but an alarm m ay tak e plac e or pr oper o perat ion m ay n ot be p erfor med. Remove the caus e of warn ing ac cordi ng to this sect ion. Us e the MR C onfi gurato r to ref er to a f a[...]

  • Pagina 631

    16 - 110 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION Display Nam e Definition Cause Act ion 1. Battery cable is open. Repair cable or changed. A92 Open batt ery cable warning Absolu te positi on detection s ystem battery voltage is low. 2. Battery volt age supplied from the servo amplifi er to the encoder fell to about 3V or les s. (Detect ed with the encode[...]

  • Pagina 632

    16 - 111 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION Display Nam e Def inition Caus e Act ion 1. Noise entered the encoder. Take nois e suppression measures. AE3 Abs olute posit ion counter warning Absolu te positi on encoder pulses fault y. 2. Encoder faulty. Change the s ervo motor. The multi -revolution counter value of the absolute position encoder excee[...]

  • Pagina 633

    16 - 112 16. INDEXER POSITIONING OPERATION 16.12.5 Po int tab le error W hen a point tab le err or occ urs, th e param eter err or (A 37) occur s. Af ter the param eter No. of param eter er ror (A37), the p oint t able er ror d etails are displa yed. Point table error details For the point table No. 1 speed data error A L 3 7 # 0 0 P B 1 0 P B 1 1 [...]

  • Pagina 634

    App. - 1 A PPENDIX App. 1 Par amet er lis t POINT For an y parameter whose s y m bol is preceded by *, se t the param eter value and switc h power of f once, then sw itch it o n again to m ak e that param eter setting v alid. Basic s etting paramet ers (PA ) Gain/f ilter parameters (PB ) No. Symbol Name No. S ymbol Nam e PA01 *STY Control mode PB01[...]

  • Pagina 635

    App. - 2 A PPENDI X Extension sett ing parameters (PC ) I /O setting paramet ers (PD ) No. Symbol Name No. Symbol Nam e PC01 For m anufacturer s etting PD01 *DIA1 Input signal automatic ON sel ection 1 PC02 *ZTY Hom e position return type PD02 For manufacturer setting PC03 *ZDIR Hom e position return direction P D03 *DIA 3 I nput signal automatic O[...]

  • Pagina 636

    App. - 3 A PPENDI X App. 2 Sig nal lay out re cording paper CN6 11 4 21 5 DICOM 31 6 DOCOM 41 7 5 6 8 10 12 7 9 11 13 19 21 23 25 18 20 22 24 26 LB LA LZ LG LBR LAR LZR PP NP OPC[...]

  • Pagina 637

    App. - 4 A PPENDI X App. 3 Tw in type connector: o utline dr awi ng for 721- 2105/026-000( W AGO) [Unit: mm] Driver slot 5.25 5 Detecting hole Coding finger Latch 2.7 20.8 5.8 10.6 15.1 2.9 26.45 4.75 25 2.7 5 5 4 5( 20 ) Wire inserting hole[...]

  • Pagina 638

    App. - 5 A PPENDI X Ap p. 4 Change of connector sets to the RoHS compatible pr oducts Connec tor s ets (opt ions ) in the f ollowi ng t able ar e ch anged t o the RoH S com patib le prod ucts after Sept ember , 2006 s hipm ent. Pleas e accep t that the cur rent pro ducts m ight be m ixed with RoH S com patible pr oduc ts base d on avai labil ity. M[...]

  • Pagina 639

    App. - 6 A PPENDI X App. 5 MR -J3-200 T-RT s erv o ampli fier Connec tors ( CNP1, CNP 2, an d CNP3) and app earan ce of MR-J3- 200T serv o am plif ier ha ve be en cha nge d from Januar y 2008 produc ti on. Mod el nam e of th e ex istin g ser vo am plifi er is c h an ged t o MR-J3- 200T -RT . The diff erenc e betw een ne w MR- J3-20 0T ser vo am pli[...]

  • Pagina 640

    App. - 7 A PPENDI X App. 5.2 Configurat ion inc ludi ng auxiliar y equipm ent ( 1.7 Configur atio n includi ng auxil iar y equipm ent) R S T CN5 CN3 CN2 CN4 CN6 CC-Link P C P 1 P 2 L 21 L 11 U CN1 UV W L 1 L 3 L 2 (Note 3) Power supply No-fuse breaker (NFB) or fuse Magne tic contactor (MC) (Note2) Line noise filter (FR-BSF01) (Note 1) Batter y MR-J[...]

  • Pagina 641

    App. - 8 A PPENDI X App. 5.3 CN P1, CNP 2, CNP3 wiring m ethod (4.3.3 C NP1, CNP 2, CNP3 wiring m ethod) (a) Ser vo am plif ier power s upp ly conn ectors Servo amplifier power supply connectors CNP3 CNP1 CNP2 <Applica ble cab le examp le> Cable fini sh OD: t o 5mm <Applicab l e cable example> Cable fin ish OD: to 3.8mm Connector for CN[...]

  • Pagina 642

    App. - 9 A PPENDI X App. 5.4 O UTLINE DR AW INGS (Chapter 1 2 OUT LINE DR A W INGS) [Unit: mm] 85 6 78 Approx. 25.5 90 Approx. 68 6 6 45 Approx. 80 195 21.4 6 CNP1 CNP3 CNP2 CN1 6 mounting hole With MR-J3BAT Rating plate Cooling fan wind direction Mass: 2.3 [kg] (5.07 [lb]) U V W CNP3 P C D L 11 L 21 CNP2 L 1 L 2 L 3 N P 1 P 2 CNP1 Terminal signal [...]

  • Pagina 643

    App. - 10 A PPENDI X App. 6 Sel ection ex ample of serv o motor p ower cable POINT Selectio n con ditio n of wire si ze is as f ollo ws. W ire length: 30m or les s Depending on the ca ble sel ected, ther e ma y be cases that the c able do es not fit into the Mitsubis hi optional or recom mended c able c lamp. Sel ect a ca ble clam p according to th[...]

  • Pagina 644

    App. - 11 A PPENDI X App. 7 Par amet er lis t POINT For an y parameter whose s y m bol is preceded by *, se t the param eter value and switc h power of f once, then sw itch it o n again to m ak e that param eter setting v alid. Basic s etting paramet ers (PA ) Gain/f ilter parameters (PB ) No. Symbol Name No. S ymbol Nam e PA01 *STY Control mode PB[...]

  • Pagina 645

    App. - 12 A PPENDI X Extension sett ing parameters (PC ) I /O setting paramet ers (PD ) No. Symbol Name No. Symbol Nam e PC01 For m anufacturer s etting PD01 *DIA1 Input signal automatic ON sel ection 1 PC02 *ZTY Hom e position return type PD02 For manufacturer setting PC03 *ZDIR Hom e position return direction P D03 Not used in indexer positi onin[...]

  • Pagina 646

    App. - 13 A PPENDI X App. 8 Prog ram ex ample with M ELSEC-A s eri es progr ammable controll ers (point t able posit ioning operation) App. 8.1 Function- by-func tion pro gramm ing exam ples This sect ion ex plai ns sp ecif ic program m ing exam ples for s erv o oper ation, m onitor, par ameter rea d an d writ e, and ot hers o n th e basis of t he [...]

  • Pagina 647

    App. - 14 A PPENDI X App. 8.1 .2 Read ing the s ervo am plifier status Read th e ser vo amplif ier s tatus from the m aster stat ion b uff er m emor y. The s erv o ampl ifier stat us is al ways stored i n the rem ote inp ut RX (addr ess es E0 H to 1 5F H ) Read th e servo am plifier s tatus of s tati on 1 to M0 t o M31. Reads remote input (RX00 to [...]

  • Pagina 648

    App. - 15 A PPENDI X App. 8.1 .3 W riting the op eration c omm ands To op erate the ser vo ampli fier, writ e the opera tion com mands to th e rem ote out put R Y (ad dresses 1 60 H to 1DF H ). Perform posi tion ing op eratio n of point table No.2 for th e ser vo am plif ier of stat ion 2 . Start t he o perat ion by tur ning o n X2 0. Point tab le [...]

  • Pagina 649

    App. - 16 A PPENDI X App. 8.1 .4 Readin g the da ta Read v arious data of t he se rvo am plif ier. (1) Re adin g the moni tor valu e Read the (f eedb ack puls e value) of the serv o am plifier of statio n 2 to D1. Data No. Descri ption H000A Cum ulative feedback pulse dat a (hexadecimal) Read th e cum ulat ive fe edbac k pulse m on itor b y turni n[...]

  • Pagina 650

    App. - 17 A PPENDI X (2) R eading the par am eter Read par am eter N o.PA0 4 "F unctio n sel ectio n A-1 " of th e ser vo am plif ier of stati on 2 to D1. Data No. Descri ption H8200 Parameter group selection H2024 Parameter No.PA04 setting (hex a decimal ) Read th e param eter No.PA 04 b y turnin g on X20. The res pond c ode at ins truc [...]

  • Pagina 651

    App. - 18 A PPENDI X (3) R eading the alarm defin ition Read th e al arm defin ition of the ser vo am plifier of stati on 2 t o D1. Data No. Descri ption H0010 Occurring alarm/warning No. (hexadecim al) Read c urren t alarm s by turnin g on X 20. The res pond c ode at ins truc tion c ode execu tion is set to D9. Read c ommand Reads remote inp ut (R[...]

  • Pagina 652

    App. - 19 A PPENDI X App. 8.1 .5 W riting the dat a This sect ion ex plains the program s f or wri ting v ario us data to t he ser vo am plif ier. (1) Wr iting the ser vo motor speed da ta of point ta ble Change the s ervo m otor spee d dat a in th e po int tab le N o.1 of the s ervo amplif ier of st ation 2 to "100". The f ollowi ng sho [...]

  • Pagina 653

    App. - 20 A PPENDI X (2) Wr iting the par am eter The f ollowi ng sho ws a pr ogr am ex ample when t wo st ations are oc cupi ed. Chang e par ameter No. PC12 ( JOG s pee d) of the ser vo amplif ier of st atio n 2 to "100 ". The par am eter gr oup PC is spec ified as fo llo ws. Code No. Descri ption 8200h Parameter group select ion Set dat[...]

  • Pagina 654

    App. - 21 A PPENDI X (3) Ser vo am pl ifier alarm res etting progr am ex am ples (a) D eacti vate th e al arm of the s ervo amplif ier of s tation 2 b y issu ing a c omm and f rom the program m able contr oller. Reset the servo am plifi er on the oc curre nce of a serv o alarm by turn ing on X20. Reads remote inp ut (RX20 to RX5F) of bu ffer memory[...]

  • Pagina 655

    App. - 22 A PPENDI X App. 8.1. 6 Operati on This sect ion ex plains the operat ion progr ams of the ser vo am plifier . (1) JO G oper atio n Perfor m J OG op eratio n of the s ervo amplif ier of s tatio n 1 and read the "curr ent p ositi on" dat a. Code No. Des cription H0001 Lower 16-bit dat a of current position (hexadecimal) H0002 Uppe[...]

  • Pagina 656

    App. - 23 A PPENDI X (2) R emote r egis ter-bas ed p ositi on data /speed dat a sett ing The f ollow ing pro gram exa m ple is on ly ap plic able when t wo st ati ons are occu pied . Opera te the s erv o am plifi er of sta tion 2 after s pec if ying th e pos itio n data as "1000 00" and the sp eed dat a as "10 00" i n the d irec[...]

  • Pagina 657

    App. - 24 A PPENDI X (3) R emote r egis ter-bas ed point table No. set ting (incre m ental val ue com m and s ystem ) The f ollow ing pro gram exa m ple is on ly ap plic able when t wo st ati ons are occu pied . Opera te the s erv o am plifi er of stati on 2 with i ncrem ental valu es af ter s pecif ying the po int t able N o.5 i n the direc t spec[...]

  • Pagina 658

    App. - 25 A PPENDI X App. 8.2 Continuo us operat ion pr ogram exam ple This section s ho ws a progr am example which i nclud es a s eries of c omm unicat ion op erat ions f rom a servo start. T he progr am will be d escrib ed on t he basis of the equipm ent m ak eup shown in appe ndix 8.2.1, a ppen dix 8.2. 3. App. 8.2 .1 Syst em c onfiguratio n ex[...]

  • Pagina 659

    App. - 26 A PPENDI X App. 8.2 .2 Program exam ple when 1 s tation is occupi ed POINT To ex ecute a dog t ype hom e positio n retur n with the C C-Link comm unication functions , set " 0 " in param eter No. PD14 and us e Proxi m ity dog (DOG) with the rem ote inpu t (R Y03) in t his exam ple. Opera te the s erv o am plifi er of stat ion 1 [...]

  • Pagina 660

    App. - 27 A PPENDI X No. selection 2 No. selection 3 No. selection 4 No. selection 5 No. selection 1 Forward rot ation JOG command Reverse rota tion JOG command Writes M100 t o M131 to r emote output ( RY00 to RY2F) of buffer mem ory. Forwa rd rotation start requ est Reverse rota tion start re quest Point table No. selection 1 (RY0A) Forwa rd rotat[...]

  • Pagina 661

    App. - 28 A PPENDI X App. 8.2 .3 System c onfiguratio n exam ple when 2 s tati ons are occ upied As sho wn belo w, the CC-Li nk s ystem m aster local u nit is load ed to run o ne ser vo am plifi ers ( 2 statio n occupi ed). Input module A1SX40 (X20 to X2F) Master station A1SJ61BT 11 (X/Y00 to 1F) CPU A1SHCPU Power supply A1S62 PN Programmable contr[...]

  • Pagina 662

    App. - 29 A PPENDI X App. 8.2 .4 Program exam ple when 2 s tations ar e occ upied POINT To ex ecute a dog t ype hom e positio n retur n with the C C-Link comm unication functions , set " 0 " in param eter No. PD14 and us e Proxi m ity dog (DOG) with the rem ote inpu t (R Y03) in t his exam ple. Opera te the s erv o am plifi er of statio n[...]

  • Pagina 663

    App. - 30 A PPENDI X Writes M 100 to M16 3 to remote ou tput (RY00 t o RY3F ) of bu ffe r memory. Forw ard rotation start r equest Reve rse rota tion st art reque st Forward rota ti on JOG comman d Reverse r otation JOG command Positi on/speed setting s y stem changing command Positioning start comma nd In posi tio n Rough match Home position retur[...]

  • Pagina 664

    REVISIONS *The m anual num ber is g iven on th e bottom left of the bac k co ver. Print Data *Manual Nu mber Revision Apr., 2006 SH(NA)030058-A First edition Jul., 2006 SH(NA)030058-B Chapter 2 Section 3.5.2(2) Section 3.5.3 Section 3.6.3(1) Section 3.6.3(2) Section 3.6.3(3) Section 3.7.1 Section 4.8.2(3) (b) Section 4.10.2( 2) Section 5.6.5(2) Sec[...]

  • Pagina 665

    Print Data *Manual Number Rev ision Oct., 2007 SH(NA)030058-C Section 13.2 Section 13.3 Section 13.5 Section 14.1.1 Section 14.1.1 2) Section 14.1.2 Section 14.2 (1) Section 14.2 (2) (b) Section 14.2 (3) Section 14.2 (4) Section 14.2 (5)(b),(c) Section 14.2 (5) Section 14.3 (3) (b) Section 14.4 (2) Section 14.4 (3) Section 14.4 (4) Section 14.5 (3)[...]

  • Pagina 666

    Print Data *Manual Number Rev ision Feb., 2008 SH(N A)030058-D Section 4.10.2 (3)(b) Section 4.11.2 (1) Section 4.11.2 (5) to (8) Section 5.3 (1) Section 5.3 (2) Section 7.2 (1) Section 7.2 (2) 1) Section 8.5.7 ( 1)(a) Section 11.4.2 Section 12.1 (5) Section 14.1.1 2) Section 14.1.3 (2) Section 14.1.4 (2) Section 14.5 (3) (a), (b) Section 14.5 (4) [...]

  • Pagina 667

    Print Data *Manual Number Rev ision Jun., 2008 SH(NA)030058-E Section 5.6.11 (2) Section 5.6.12 (2) Section 6.3 Section 6.4.3 Section 6.4.4 Section 7.7.1 Section 11.4.2 Section 14.1 Chapter 16 Appendix 7 Appendix 8 Note. Change of sentence Note. Change of sentence Parameter No.PC2 8 added Addition Addition Starting method added “Cause” add ed t[...]

  • Pagina 668

    SH (NA) 030058-E (0806) MEE Printed in Japan Specifications subject to change without notice. This Instruction Manual uses recycled paper. MODEL MODEL CODE HEAD OFFICE : TOKYO BLDG MARUNOUCHI TOKYO 100-8310 J3 Series MR-J3- T Servo Amplifier Instruction Manual (CC-Link) E General-Purpose AC Servo MODEL MR-J3- T SERVO AMPLIFIER INSTRUCTION MANUAL (C[...]